CNC Pilot

User’s Manual
CNC PILOT 620
NC Software
688 945-01
English (en)
10/2010
Controls and displays of the CNC PILOT 620 Numeric keypad
Keys on visual display unit Key Function block
Number keys 0-9:
Key Function
0 9
Switches the help graphics between outside Numeric input keys
and inside machining (only in the cycle Menu operation
programming)
Decimal point
No function
Switchover between positive and negative
Soft keys for selecting functions on screen /+ values
Switches to the soft-key menu at left / right Escape key: Cancelation of dialogs and next
higher menu level
Switches to the next menu in the PLC menu Insert key: OK in dialogs and new NC blocks
in the editor
DEL Delete block: Deletes the selected area
Operating mode keys
Key Function Backspace: Deletes the character to the left
Machine operating modes: of the cursor
Manual Operation CE key: Deletes the error messages in the
CE machine operating mode
Program Run
Enter: Confirms the input
Programming modes
smart.Turn
Special keys
DINplus
DIN/ISO Key Function
Error key: Opens the error window
Tables for tool data and technology data ERR
Starts the integrated calculator

Organization: CALC
Parameters Info key: Shows additional information in the

File organization parameter editor
Transfer Activates special functions, such as input
Diagnosis options or input of characters as on an
alphabetic keyboard
smart.Turn keys
Machine operating panel
Key Function
Key Function
Go to the next form
Cycle start
Next / previous group
Cycle stop
Navigation keys Feed rate stop

Key Function
Up/Down arrow keys Spindle stop
Left/Right arrow keys Spindle on – M3/M4 direction
Screen page or dialog page up/down Spindle jog – M3/M4 direction. The spindle
rotates as long as you press the key.
Go to beginning of program/list or to end of Manual direction keys +X/–X
program/list
Operating panel of the CNC PILOT 620
CNC PILOT 620, Software and
Features
This manual describes functions that are available in the CNC PILOT
with NC software number 688 945-01.
The programming of smart.Turn and DIN PLUS are not included in this
manual. These functions are described in the User's Manual for
smart.Turn and DIN PLUS Programming (ID 685 556-xx). Please
contact HEIDENHAIN if you require a copy of this manual.
The machine manufacturer adapts the features offered by the control
to the capabilities of the specific machine tool by setting machine
parameters. Therefore, some of the functions described in this manual
may not be among the features provided by the CNC PILOT on your
machine tool.
Some of the CNC PILOT functions that are not available on every
machine are:
Positioning of spindle (M19) and driven tool
Operations with the C or Y axis
Please contact your machine manufacturer for detailed information on
the features that are supported by your machine tool.
Many machine manufacturers and HEIDENHAIN offer programming
courses. We recommend these courses as an effective way of
improving your programming skill and sharing information and ideas
with other CNC PILOT users.
HEIDENHAIN also offers the PC software DataPilot MP620 or
DataPilot CP 620 for personal computers, which is designed to
simulate the functions of the MANUALplus 620 control and
CNC PILOT 620. The DataPilot is suitable for both shop-floor
programming as well as off-location program creation and testing. It is
also ideal for training purposes. The DataPilot can be run on
WINDOWS operating systems.
Intended place of operation

The CNC PILOT complies with the limits for a Class A device in
accordance with the specifications in EN 55022, and is intended for
use primarily in industrially-zoned areas.
Legal information
This product uses open source software. Further information is
available on the control under
8 Programming and Editing operating mode
8 MOD function
8 LICENSE INFO soft key
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 620 5

6
About this Manual
About this Manual
The symbols used in this manual are described below.
This symbol indicates that important information about the

function described must be considered.
This symbol indicates that there is one or more of the

following risks when using the described function:
Danger to workpiece
Danger to fixtures
Danger to tool
Danger to machine
Danger to operator
This symbol indicates that the described function must be

adapted by the machine tool builder. The function
described may therefore vary depending on the machine.
This symbol indicates that you can find detailed

information about a function in another manual.
Do you want any changes, or have you found

any errors?
We are continuously striving to improve our documentation for you.
Please help us by sending your requests to the following e-mail
address: [email protected].

About this Manual
8
Contents Introduction and Fundamentals
1
Basics of Operation
2
Machine Mode of Operation
3
Cycle Programming
4
ICP Programming
5
Graphic Simulation
6
Tool Editor
7
Organization Mode of Operation
8
Tables and Overviews
9
Overview of Cycles
10

1 Introduction and Fundamentals ..... 29
1.1 The CNC PILOT ..... 30
1.2 Configuration ..... 31
Slide position ..... 31
Tool carrier systems ..... 31
The C axis ..... 31
The Y axis ..... 32
1.3 Features ..... 33
Configuration ..... 33
Modes of operation ..... 33
1.4 Data Backup ..... 35
1.5 Explanation of Terms ..... 36
1.6 CNC PILOT Design ..... 37
1.7 Fundamentals ..... 38
Position encoders and reference marks ..... 38
Axis designations ..... 38
Coordinate system ..... 39
Absolute coordinates ..... 39
Incremental coordinates ..... 40
Polar coordinates ..... 40
Machine zero point ..... 40
Workpiece zero point ..... 41
Units of measure ..... 41
1.8 Tool Dimensions ..... 42
Tool length ..... 42
Tool compensation ..... 42
Tool-tip radius compensation (TRC) ..... 43
Milling cutter radius compensation (MCRC) ..... 43

2 Basics of Operation ..... 45
2.1 General Information on Operation ..... 46
Operation ..... 46
Setup ..... 46
Programming – Teach-in mode ..... 46
Programming – smart.Turn ..... 46
2.2 The CNC PILOT Screen ..... 47
2.3 Operation and Data Input ..... 48
Operating modes ..... 48
Menu selection ..... 49
Soft keys ..... 49
Data input ..... 50
smart.Turn dialogs ..... 50
List operations ..... 50
Alphanumeric keyboard ..... 51
2.4 Integrated Calculator ..... 52
Calculator functions ..... 52
Adjusting the position of the calculator ..... 54
2.5 Types of Programs ..... 55
2.6 The Error Messages ..... 56
Displaying the error ..... 56
Opening the error window ..... 56
Closing the error window ..... 56
Detailed error messages ..... 57
“Details” soft key ..... 57
Clearing errors ..... 58
Error log file ..... 58
Keystroke log file ..... 59
Saving service files ..... 59
12
3 Machine Mode of Operation ..... 61
3.1 Machine Mode of Operation ..... 62
3.2 Switch-On / Switch-Off ..... 63
Switch-on ..... 63
Monitoring EnDat encoders ..... 63
Traversing the reference marks ..... 64
Switch-off ..... 65
3.3 Machine Data ..... 66
Input of machine data ..... 66
Machine data display ..... 68
Cycle statuses ..... 70
Axis feed rate ..... 70
Spindle ..... 71
3.4 Setting Up a Tool List ..... 72
Machine with turret ..... 72
Machine with multifix ..... 72
Tools in different quadrants ..... 73
Filling the turret list from the database ..... 74
Filling the turret list ..... 75
Tool call ..... 76
Driven tools ..... 76
Tool life monitoring ..... 77
3.5 Machine Setup ..... 78
Defining the workpiece zero point ..... 78
Homing the axes ..... 79
Setting the protection zone ..... 80
Defining the tool change position ..... 81
Setting C-axis values ..... 82
3.6 Tool Measurement ..... 83
Touch off ..... 84
Touch probe (table-mounted) ..... 85
Optical gauge ..... 86
Tool compensation ..... 87
3.7 "Manual Operation" Operating Mode ..... 88
Tool change ..... 88
Spindle ..... 88
Handwheel operation ..... 88
Manual direction keys ..... 89
Teach-in cycles in Manual mode ..... 89
3.8 Teach-in Mode ..... 90
Teach-in mode ..... 90
Programming teach-in cycles ..... 90

3.9 Program Run Mode ..... 91
Loading a program ..... 91
Comparing a tool list ..... 92
Before executing a program ..... 92
Finding a start block ..... 93
Program execution ..... 94
Entering compensation values during program run ..... 95
Program execution in “dry run” mode ..... 98
3.10 Graphic Simulation ..... 99
3.11 Program Management ..... 100
Program selection ..... 100
Program organization ..... 101
3.12 Conversion into DIN Format ..... 102
Making a conversion ..... 102
3.13 Units of Measure ..... 103
14
4 Teach-in Mode ..... 105
4.1 Working with Teach-in Cycles ..... 106
Cycle starting point ..... 106
Help graphics ..... 107
DIN macros ..... 107
Graphical test run (simulation) ..... 107
Cycle keys ..... 107
Switching functions (M functions) ..... 108
Comments ..... 108
Cycle menu ..... 109
Addresses used in many cycles ..... 111
4.2 Workpiece Blank Cycles ..... 112
Bar/tube blank ..... 113
ICP workpiece blank contour ..... 114
4.3 Single Cut Cycles ..... 115
Rapid traverse positioning ..... 116
Approach the tool change position ..... 117
Linear machining, longitudinal ..... 118
Linear machining, transverse ..... 119
Linear machining at angle ..... 120
Circular machining ..... 122
Chamfer ..... 123
Rounding arc ..... 125
M functions ..... 126

4.4 Turning Cycles ..... 127
Tool position ..... 128
Roughing, longitudinal ..... 130
Roughing, transverse ..... 131
Roughing, longitudinal—expanded ..... 132
Roughing, transverse—expanded ..... 134
Finishing cut, longitudinal ..... 136
Finishing cut, transverse ..... 137
Finishing cut, longitudinal—expanded ..... 138
Finishing cut, transverse—Expanded ..... 140
Cut, longitudinal plunge ..... 142
Cut, transverse plunge ..... 144
Cut, longitudinal plunging—expanded ..... 146
Cut, transverse plunging—expanded ..... 148
Cut, longitudinal finishing plunge ..... 150
Cut, transverse finishing plunge ..... 151
Cut, longitudinal finishing plunge—expanded ..... 152
Cut, transverse finishing plunge—expanded ..... 154
Cut, ICP contour-parallel, longitudinal ..... 156
Cut, ICP contour-parallel, transverse ..... 158
Cut, ICP contour-parallel, longitudinal finishing ..... 160
Cut, ICP contour-parallel, transverse finishing ..... 161
ICP cutting, longitudinal ..... 162
ICP cutting, transverse ..... 164
ICP longitudinal finishing cut ..... 166
ICP transverse finishing cut ..... 167
Examples of turning cycles ..... 168
16
4.5 Recessing Cycles ..... 172
Cutting and infeed directions for recessing cycles ..... 172
Undercut position ..... 173
Contour forms ..... 173
Recessing, radial ..... 174
Recessing, axial ..... 175
Recessing, radial—expanded ..... 177
Recessing, axial—expanded ..... 179
Recessing radial, finishing ..... 181
Recessing axial, finishing ..... 182
Recessing radial, finishing—expanded ..... 183
Recessing axial, finishing—expanded ..... 185
ICP recessing cycles, radial ..... 187
ICP recessing cycles, axial ..... 189
ICP recessing, radial finishing ..... 191
ICP recessing, axial finishing ..... 193
Recess turning ..... 194
Recess turning, radial ..... 195
Recess turning, axial ..... 196
Recess turning, radial—expanded ..... 197
Recessing turning, axial—expanded ..... 199
Recess turning, radial finishing ..... 201
Recess turning, axial finishing ..... 203
Recess turning, radial finishing—expanded ..... 205
Recess turning, axial finishing—expanded ..... 207
ICP recess turning, radial ..... 209
ICP recess turning, axial ..... 211
ICP recess turning, radial finishing ..... 213
ICP recess turning, axial finishing ..... 215
Undercutting type H ..... 217
Undercutting type K ..... 218
Undercutting type U ..... 219
Parting ..... 221
Examples of recessing cycles ..... 223

4.6 Thread and Undercut Cycles ..... 225
Thread position, undercut position ..... 225
Handwheel superimposition ..... 226
Feed angle, thread depth, proportioning of cuts ..... 226
Thread run-in / thread run-out ..... 227
Last cut ..... 228
Thread cycle (longitudinal) ..... 229
Thread cycle (longitudinal)—expanded ..... 231
Tapered thread ..... 233
API thread ..... 235
Recut (longitudinal) thread ..... 237
Recut (longitudinal) thread—Expanded ..... 239
Recut tapered thread ..... 241
Recut API thread ..... 243
Undercut DIN 76 ..... 245
Undercut DIN 509 E ..... 247
Undercut DIN 509 F ..... 249
Examples of thread and undercut cycles ..... 251
4.7 Drilling Cycles ..... 253
Drilling, axial ..... 254
Radial drilling ..... 256
Deep-hole drilling, axial ..... 258
Deep-hole drilling, radial ..... 260
Tapping, axial ..... 262
Tapping, radial ..... 263
Thread milling, axial ..... 265
Examples of drilling cycles ..... 267
4.8 Milling Cycles ..... 269
Rapid positioning milling ..... 270
Slot, axial ..... 271
Figure, axial ..... 273
ICP contour, axial ..... 277
Face milling ..... 280
Slot, radial ..... 283
Figure, radial ..... 285
ICP contour, radial ..... 289
Helical-slot milling, radial ..... 292
Milling direction for contour milling ..... 293
Milling direction for pocket milling ..... 295
Example of milling cycle ..... 296
18
4.9 Drilling and Milling Patterns ..... 297
Linear drilling pattern, axial ..... 298
Milling pattern linear, axial ..... 300
Drilling pattern circular, axial ..... 302
Milling pattern circular, axial ..... 304
Drilling pattern linear, radial ..... 306
Linear milling pattern, radial ..... 308
Drilling pattern circular, radial ..... 310
Circular milling pattern, radial ..... 312
Examples of pattern machining ..... 314
4.10 DIN Cycles ..... 317
DIN cycle ..... 317

5 ICP Programming ..... 319
5.1 ICP Contours ..... 320
Loading contours ..... 320
Form elements ..... 321
Machining attributes ..... 321
Calculation of contour geometry ..... 322
5.2 ICP Editor in Cycle Mode ..... 323
Editing contours for cycles ..... 323
File organization with the ICP editor ..... 324
5.3 ICP Editor in smart.Turn ..... 325
Editing a contour in smart.Turn ..... 326
5.4 Creating an ICP Contour ..... 328
Entering an ICP contour ..... 328
Absolute or incremental dimensioning ..... 329
Transitions between contour elements ..... 329
Polar coordinates ..... 330
Angular input ..... 330
Contour graphics ..... 331
Selection of solutions ..... 332
Colors in contour graphics ..... 332
Selection functions ..... 333
Contour direction (cycle programming) ..... 334
5.5 Editing ICP Contours ..... 335
Superimposing form elements ..... 335
Adding contour elements ..... 335
Editing or deleting the last contour element ..... 336
Deleting a contour element ..... 336
Editing contour elements ..... 337
5.6 The Zoom Function in the ICP Editor ..... 340
Changing the view ..... 340
5.7 Defining the Workpiece Blank ..... 341
"Bar" blank ..... 341
"Tube" blank ..... 341
5.8 Contour Elements of a Turning Contour ..... 342
Basic elements of a turning contour ..... 342
Contour form elements ..... 346
5.9 Contour Elements on Face ..... 353
Starting point of face contour ..... 353
Vertical lines on face ..... 354
Horizontal lines on face ..... 354
Line at angle on face ..... 355
Circular arc on face ..... 356
Chamfer/rounding arc on the face ..... 357
20
5.10 Contour Elements on Lateral Surface ..... 358
Starting point of lateral surface contour ..... 358
Vertical lines on lateral surface ..... 359
Horizontal lines on lateral surface ..... 359
Line at angle on lateral surface ..... 360
Circular arc, lateral surface ..... 361
Chamfers/rounding arcs on a lateral surface ..... 362
5.11 C and Y Axis Machining in smart.Turn ..... 363
Reference data, nested contours ..... 364
Representation of the ICP elements in the smart.Turn program ..... 365
5.12 Face Contours in smart.Turn ..... 366
Reference data for complex face contours ..... 366
Circle on face ..... 367
Rectangle on face ..... 368
Polygon on face ..... 369
Linear slot on face ..... 370
Circular slot on face ..... 370
Hole on face ..... 371
Linear pattern on face ..... 372
Circular pattern on face ..... 373
5.13 Lateral Surface Contours in smart.Turn ..... 374
Reference data of lateral surface ..... 374
Circle on lateral surface ..... 375
Rectangle on lateral surface ..... 376
Polygon on lateral surface ..... 377
Linear slot on lateral surface ..... 378
Circular slot on lateral surface ..... 379
Hole on lateral surface ..... 380
Linear pattern on lateral surface ..... 381
Circular pattern on lateral surface ..... 382

5.14 Contours in the XY plane ..... 383
Reference data in XY plane ..... 383
Starting point of contour in XY plane ..... 384
Vertical lines in XY plane ..... 384
Horizontal lines in XY plane ..... 385
Line at angle in XY plane ..... 386
Circular arc in XY plane ..... 387
Chamfer/rounding arc in XY plane ..... 388
Circle in XY plane ..... 389
Rectangle in XY plane ..... 390
Polygon in XY plane ..... 391
Linear slot in XY plane ..... 392
Circular slot in XY plane ..... 393
Hole in XY plane ..... 394
Linear pattern in XY plane ..... 395
Circular pattern in XY plane ..... 396
Single surface in XY plane ..... 397
Centric polygon in XY plane ..... 398
5.15 Contours in the YZ Plane ..... 399
Reference data in YZ plane ..... 399
Starting point of contour in YZ plane ..... 400
Vertical lines in YZ plane ..... 400
Horizontal lines in YZ plane ..... 401
Line at angle in YZ plane ..... 402
Circular arc in YZ plane ..... 403
Chamfer/rounding arc in YZ plane ..... 404
Circle in YZ plane ..... 405
Rectangle in YZ plane ..... 406
Polygon in YZ plane ..... 407
Linear slot in YZ plane ..... 408
Circular slot in YZ plane ..... 408
Hole in YZ plane ..... 409
Linear pattern in YZ plane ..... 410
Circular pattern in YZ plane ..... 411
Single surface in YZ plane ..... 412
Centric polygons in YZ plane ..... 413
5.16 Loading Existing Contours ..... 414
Integrating cycle contours in smart.Turn ..... 414
DXF contours (option) ..... 415
22
6 Graphic Simulation ..... 417
6.1 Simulation Mode of Operation ..... 418
Using the graphic simulation ..... 419
The miscellaneous functions ..... 420
6.2 Simulation Window ..... 421
Setting up the views ..... 421
Single-window view ..... 421
Multiple window view ..... 422
6.3 Views ..... 423
Traverse path display ..... 423
Tool depiction ..... 423
Material-removal graphic ..... 424
3-D View ..... 425
6.4 The Zoom Function ..... 426
Adjusting the visible section ..... 426
6.5 Simulation with Mid-program Startup ..... 428
Mid-program startup with DIN PLUS programs ..... 428
Mid-program startup in cycle programs ..... 429
6.6 Time Calculation ..... 430
Showing the machining times ..... 430

7 Tool and Technology Database ..... 431
7.1 Tool Database ..... 432
Tool types ..... 432
Multipoint tools ..... 433
Tool life management ..... 433
7.2 Tool Editor ..... 434
Tool list ..... 434
Editing the tool data ..... 435
Tool texts ..... 436
Editing multipoint tools ..... 437
Editing tool-life data ..... 439
7.3 Tool Data ..... 440
General tool parameters ..... 440
Standard turning tools ..... 443
Recessing tools ..... 444
Thread-cutting tools ..... 445
Twist drills and indexable-insert drills ..... 446
NC center drill ..... 447
Centering tool ..... 448
Counterbore ..... 449
Countersink ..... 450
Tap ..... 451
Standard milling tools ..... 452
Thread milling tools ..... 453
Angle cutters ..... 454
Milling pins ..... 455
Touch probes ..... 456
7.4 Technology Database ..... 457
Technology editor ..... 458
Editing a workpiece material or cutting material list ..... 459
Displaying/editing cutting data ..... 460
24
8 Organization Mode of Operation ..... 463
8.1 Organization Mode of Operation ..... 464
8.2 Parameters ..... 465
Parameter editor ..... 465
List of user parameters ..... 467
8.3 Transfer ..... 471
Data backup ..... 471
Data exchange with TNCremo ..... 471
Connections ..... 472
Data transfer options ..... 475
Transferring programs (files) ..... 476
Transferring parameters ..... 478
Transferring tool data ..... 479
Service files ..... 480
Creating a data backup file ..... 481
Importing NC programs from predecessor controls ..... 482
8.4 Service Pack ..... 486
Installing a service pack ..... 486
Uninstalling a service pack ..... 487

9 Tables and Overviews ..... 489
9.1 Thread Pitch ..... 490
Thread parameters ..... 490
Thread pitch ..... 491
9.2 Undercut Parameters ..... 497
DIN 76—undercut parameters ..... 497
DIN 509 E – undercut parameters ..... 499
DIN 509 F – undercut parameters ..... 499
9.3 Technical Information ..... 500
26
10 Overview of Cycles ..... 509
10.1 Workpiece Blank Cycles, Single Cut Cycles ..... 510
10.2 Turning Cycles ..... 511
10.3 Recessing and Recess-Turning Cycles ..... 512
10.4 Thread Cycles ..... 513
10.5 Drilling Cycles ..... 514
10.6 Milling Cycles ..... 515

28
Introduction and
Fundamentals

1.1 The CNC PILOT
1.1 The CNC PILOT
The CNC PILOT was conceived for CNC lathes. It is suitable for
horizontal and vertical lathes. The CNC PILOT supports lathes with
tool turrets. The tool carrier of horizontal lathes can be located in front
of or behind the workpiece.
The CNC PILOT supports lathes with spindle, one slide (X and Z axis),
C axis or positionable spindle, driven tool and machines with a Y axis.
Regardless of whether you are turning simple parts or complex
workpieces, the CNC PILOT provides you with the benefits of
graphical contour input and convenient programming with smart.Turn.
Programming with variables, controlling special machine components,
or using externally created programs, etc. is no problem: Switch to
DINplus. This programming mode helps you solve all your special
tasks.
The CNC PILOT also offers the powerful Teach-in mode. It enables
you to perform simple machining, rework or repair operations without
writing NC programs.
The CNC PILOT supports operations with the C axis in cycle,
smart.Turn and DIN programming. In the Y axis, the CNC PILOT
supports operations with smart.Turn and DIN programming.
30 Introduction and Fundamentals

1.2 Configuration
1.2 Configuration
In the standard version, the control is equipped with the axes X and Z
and a main spindle. Optionally, a C axis, a Y axis, and a driven tool can
be configured.
Slide position
The machine tool builder configures the CNC PILOT. These are the
available possibilities:
Z axis horizontal with tool slide behind the workpiece
Z axis horizontal with tool slide in front of the workpiece
Z axis vertical with tool slide to the right of the workpiece
The menu symbols, help graphics and graphic representations during
ICP and simulation consider the slide position.
The representations in this User’s Manual assume a lathe with tool
carrier behind the workpiece.
Tool carrier systems

The CNC PILOT 620 supports turrets with a number n of tool mounts
as tool carriers.
The C axis
With a C axis you can drill and mill a workpiece on its face and lateral
surfaces.
When the C axis is used, one axis interpolates linearly or circularly with
the spindle in the given working plane, while the third axis interpolates
linearly.
The CNC PILOT supports part program creation with the C axis in:
Teach-in mode
smart.Turn programming
DINplus programming

1.2 Configuration
The Y axis
With a Y axis you can drill and mill a workpiece on its face and lateral
surfaces.
During use of the Y axis, two axes interpolate linearly or circularly in
the given working plane, while the third axis interpolates linearly. This
enables you to machine slots or pockets, for example, with plane
floors and perpendicular edges. By defining the spindle angle, you can
determine the position of the milling contour on the workpiece.
The CNC PILOT supports part program creation with the Y axis in:
DINplus programming

1.3 Features
1.3 Features
Configuration
Basic version: X and Z axis, spindle
Positionable spindle and driven tool
C axis and driven tool
Y axis and driven tool
Digital current and speed control
Modes of operation
Manual operation
Manual slide movement through axis-direction keys or electronic
handwheels.
Graphic support for entering and running Teach-in cycles without
saving the machining steps in alternation with manual machine
operation.
Thread reworking (thread repair in a second workpiece setup).
Teach-in mode
Sequential linking of Teach-in cycles, where each cycle is run
immediately after input, or is graphically simulated and subsequently
saved.
Program Run
All are possible in single-block and full-sequence modes
DINplus programs
smart.Turn programs
Teach-in programs
Setup functions
Workpiece datum setting
Definition of tool-change position
Definition of protection zone
Tool measurement through touch-off, touch probe or optical gauge
Programming
Teach-in programming
Interactive Contour Programming (ICP)
DINplus programming

1.3 Features
Graphic simulation
Graphic depiction of the sequence of smart.Turn or DINplus
programs and graphic depiction of a Teach-in cycle or Teach-in
program
Simulation of the tool paths as wire-frame or cutting-path graphics,
special identification of the rapid-traverse paths
Machining simulation (2-D material-removal graphic)
Side or face view, or 2-D view of cylindrical surface
Display of programmed contours
Shifting and magnifying functions
Tool system
Database for 250 tools, optionally 999 tools
Description can be entered for every tool
Optional support of multipoint tools (tools with multiple reference
points or multiple cutting edges)
Turret or multifix system
Technology database
The cutting data are entered in the cycle or in the UNIT as default
values.
9 workpiece-material/tool-material combinations (144 entries)
Optionally 62 workpiece-material/tool-material combinations (992
entries)
Interpolation
Linear: In 2 main axes (max. ± 100 m)
Circular: in 2 axes (radius max. 999 m)
C axis: Interpolation in the linear axes X and Z with the C axis
Y axis: Linear or circular interpolation of two axes in the given plane.
The respective third axis can simultaneously perform linear
interpolation.
G17: XY plane
G18: XZ plane
G19: YZ plane

1.4 Data Backup
1.4 Data Backup
HEIDENHAIN recommends saving new programs and files created on
a PC at regular intervals.
HEIDENHAIN provides a backup function for this purpose in the data
transfer software TNCremoNT. Your machine tool builder can provide
you with a copy.
You additionally need a data medium on which all machine-specific
data, such as the PLC program, machine parameters, etc., are stored.
Please contact your machine tool builder.

1.5 Explanation of Terms
1.5 Explanation of Terms
Cursor: In lists, or during data input, a list item, an input field or a
character is highlighted. This “highlight” is called a cursor. Entries
and operations, like copying, deleting, inserting a new item, etc.,
refer to the current cursor position.
Arrow keys: The cursor is moved with the horizontal and vertical
arrow keys and with the PG UP / PG DN keys.
Page keys: The PG UP / PG DN keys are also called “Page keys.”
Navigating: Within a list or an input box, you can move the cursor
to any position you would like to check, change, delete or add to. In
other words, you “navigate” through the list.
Active/ inactive windows, functions, menu items: Of all
windows that are displayed on the screen, only one is active. That
means, any data you type on the keyboard or keypad are entered in
the active window only. In the active window the title bar is shown
in color. In the inactive windows, the title bar appears dimmed.
Inactive function keys or menu keys also appear dimmed.
Menu, menu key: The CNC PILOT arranges the available functions
and function groups in a 9-field box. This box is called a menu. Each
symbol in the menu is a menu key.
Editing: Editing is changing, deleting and adding to parameters,
commands, etc. within programs, tool data or parameters.
Default value: If the parameters of cycles or DIN commands are
preassigned values, these values are referred to as default values.
These values are used if you do not enter the parameters.
Byte: The capacity of storage media is measured in bytes. Since the
CNC PILOT features an internal memory, the individual program
lengths are expressed in bytes.
Extension: File names consist of the actual name and the
extension. The name part and the extension part are separated by a
dot ("."). The extension indicates the type of file. Examples:
*.NC "DIN programs"
*.NCS “DIN subprograms (DIN macros)”
Soft key: Soft keys are the unmarked keys along the side of the
screen. The meaning of each key is shown on the screen.
Form: The individual pages of a dialog are shown as easy-to-fill
forms.
UNITS: A UNIT is a group of function united into a dialog in
smart.Turn.

1.6 CNC PILOT Design
1.6 CNC PILOT Design
The dialog between machinist and control takes place via:
Screen
Soft keys
Data input keypad
Machine operating panel
The entered data can be displayed and checked on the screen. With
the soft key directly below the screen, you can select functions,
capture position values, confirm entries, and a lot more.
With the ERR key you can call error and PLC information.
The data input keyboard (operating panel) serves for the input of
machine data, positioning data, etc. The CNC PILOT does not need an
alphanumeric keyboard. Tool descriptions, program descriptions or
comments in a DIN program are entered with an on-screen
alphanumeric keyboard. The machine operating panel contains all
necessary controls for manual operation of the lathe.
The actual control is not accessible to the machinist. You should know,
however, that your control has an integrated memory on which all
cycle programs, ICP contours and DIN programs that you enter are
stored. This allows you to save a very large number of programs.
For data exchange and data backup, you can use the Ethernet
interface and the USB interface.

1.7 Fundamentals
1.7 Fundamentals
Position encoders and reference marks
The machine axes are equipped with position encoders that register
the positions of the slide or tool. When a machine axis moves, the
corresponding position encoder generates an electrical signal. The
control evaluates this signal and calculates the precise actual position XMP
of the machine axis.
If there is a power interruption, the calculated position will no longer X (Z,Y)
correspond to the actual position of the machine slide. To recover this
association, incremental position encoders are provided with
reference marks. The scales of the position encoders contain one or
more reference marks that transmit a signal to the control when they
are crossed over. From that signal the CNC PILOT can re-establish the
assignment of displayed positions to machine positions. For linear
encoders with distance-coded reference marks the machine axes
need to move by no more than 20 mm, for angle encoders by no more
than 20°.
If incremental encoders are without reference marks, fixed reference
positions have to be traversed after switch-on. The control knows the
exact distance between these reference points and the machine Zref
datum (see figure).
With absolute encoders, an absolute position value is transmitted to Xref
the control immediately upon switch-on. In this way the assignment
of the actual position to the machine slide position is re-established
directly after switch-on.
Axis designations
The cross slide is referred to as the X axis and the saddle as the Z
axis.
X+
All X-axis values that are displayed or entered are regarded as Y+
diameters.
Lathes with Y axis: The Y axis is perpendicular to the X axis and Z axis
(Cartesian system). X
When programming paths of traverse, remember to: M
Program a positive value to depart the workpiece. Z Z+
Program a negative value to approach the workpiece.

1.7 Fundamentals
Coordinate system
The meanings of the coordinates X, Y, Z, and C are specified in
DIN 66 217.
The coordinates entered for the principal axes X and Z are referenced
to the workpiece zero point. The angles entered for the rotary axis
(C axis) are referenced to the datum of the C axis.
The axis designations X and Z describe positions in a two-dimensional
coordinate system. As you can see from the figure to the center right,
the position of the tool tip is clearly defined by its X and Z coordinates.
The CNC PILOT can connect points by linear and circular paths of
traverse (interpolations). Workpiece machining is programmed by
entering the coordinates for a succession of points and connecting the
points by linear or circular paths of traverse.
Like the paths of traverse, you can also describe the complete contour
of a workpiece by defining single points through their coordinates and
connecting them by linear or circular paths of traverse.
Positions can be programmed to an accuracy of 1 µm (0.001 mm). This
is also the accuracy with which they are displayed.
Absolute coordinates
If the coordinates of a position are referenced to the workpiece datum,
they are referred to as absolute coordinates. Each position on a
workpiece is clearly defined by its absolute coordinates (see figure).

1.7 Fundamentals
Incremental coordinates
Incremental coordinates are always given with respect to the last
programmed position. They specify the distance from the last active
position and the subsequent position. Each position on a workpiece is
clearly defined by its incremental coordinates (see figure).
Polar coordinates
Positions located on the face or lateral surface can either be entered
in Cartesian coordinates or polar coordinates.
When programming with polar coordinates, a position on the
workpiece is clearly defined by the entries for diameter and angle (see
figure).
Machine zero point

The point of intersection of the X and Z axes is called the machine
zero point. On a lathe, the machine zero point is usually the point of
intersection of the spindle axis and the spindle surface. It is designated
with the letter "M" (see figure).

1.7 Fundamentals
Workpiece zero point
To machine a workpiece, it is easier to enter all input data with respect
to a zero point located on the workpiece. By programming the zero
point used in the workpiece drawing, you can take the dimensions
directly from the drawing, without further calculation. This point is the
workpiece zero point. It is designated with the letter "W" (see figure).
Units of measure
You can program the CNC PILOT either in the metric or inch system.
The units of measurement listed in the table below apply to all inputs
and displays.
Dimensions Metric Inches

Coordinates mm inch
Lengths mm inch
Angle Degrees Degrees
Spindle speed rpm rpm
Cutting speed m/min ft/min
Feed per revolution mm/rev inch/rev
Feed per minute mm/min inch/min
Acceleration m/s2 ft/s2

1.8 Tool Dimensions
1.8 Tool Dimensions
The CNC PILOT requires information on the specific tools for a variety
of tasks, such as calculating the cutting radius compensation or the
proportioning of cuts.
Tool length
All programmed and displayed position values are given with respect
to the distance between the tool tip and workpiece zero point. Since
the control only knows the absolute position of the tool carrier (slide),
The CNC PILOT needs the dimensions XL and ZL (see figure) to
calculate and display the position of the tool tip.
Tool compensation
The tool tip is subjected to wear during machining processes. To
compensate for this wear, the CNC PILOT uses compensation values.
The compensation values are managed independent of the values for
length. The system automatically adds the compensation values to the
values for length.

1.8 Tool Dimensions
Tool-tip radius compensation (TRC)
The tip of a lathe tool has a certain radius. When machining tapers,
chamfers and radii, this results in inaccuracies which the CNC PILOT
compensates with its cutting radius compensation function.
Programmed paths of traverse are referenced to the theoretical tool
tip S. With non-paraxial contours, this will lead to inaccuracies during
machining.
The TRC function compensates for this error by calculating a new path
of traverse, the equidistant line (see figure).
The CNC PILOT calculates the TRC for cycle programming. The
smart.Turn and DIN programming feature also takes the TRC for
clearance cycles into account. During DIN programming with single
paths, you can also enable/disable TRC.
Milling cutter radius compensation (MCRC)

In milling operations, the outside diameter of the milling cutter
determines the contour. When the MCRC function is not active, the
system defines the center of the cutter as reference point. The TRC
function compensates for this error by calculating a new path of
traverse, the equidistant line.

1.8 Tool Dimensions

Basics of Operation

2.1 General Information on Operation
2.1 General Information on
Operation
Operation
Select the desired operating mode with the corresponding operating
mode key.
Within the operating mode, you can change the mode through the
soft keys.
With the numeric keypad you can select the function within the
menus.
Dialogs can consist of multiple pages.
Besides with the soft keys, dialogs can be concluded positively with
"INS" or negatively with "ESC."
Changes made in lists are effective immediately. They are also
saved if the list is closed with "ESC" or "Cancel."
Setup
You will find all setup functions in the machine mode in "Manual
mode."
All preparatory work can be performed through the "setup" menu
item and "Set S,F,T."
Programming – Teach-in mode

8 Select Teach-in in the "machine" mode and use the Program list
soft key to open a new cycle program.
8 Activate the cycle menu through the Add cycle soft key. Here you
select the operation and enter the details.
8 Then press the Input finished soft key. Now you can start the
simulation and check the machining process.
8 Start the operation in the machine with "Cycle on."
8 Save that cycle after the operation is completed.
8 Repeat the last steps for each new operation.
Programming – smart.Turn
Convenient programming with UNITS in a structured NC program.
Combinable with DIN functions.
Contour definition is graphically possible.
Contour follow-up when used with a workpiece blank.
Conversion of cycle programs to smart.Turn programs with the
same functions.
46 Basics of Operation
2.2 The CNC PILOT Screen
2.2 The CNC PILOT Screen
The CNC PILOT shows the data to be displayed in windows. Some
windows only appear when they are needed, for example, for typing
in entries.
In addition, the control shows the type of operation, the soft-key

display and the PLC soft key display on the screen. Each function
that appears in a field of the soft-key row is activated by pressing the
soft key directly below it.
Operating mode line
The operating mode tabs (at the top of the screen) shows the four
operating modes as well as the submodes.
Machine display
The machine display field (beneath the operating mode tabs) is
configurable. It shows all important information on axis positions, feed
rates, rotational speeds, and tool.
Other windows used:

List and program window
Display of program lists, tool lists, parameter lists, etc. To select
specific elements from the list, simply move the highlight to the
desired element with the arrow keys.
Menu window
Display of menu symbols. This window only appears on the screen
in the Teach-in and Manual modes.
Input window/Dialog window
For entering the parameters of a cycle, ICP element, DIN command,
etc. Look over the existing data, then delete or edit them in the
dialog window.
Graphic support window
Input data (such as cycle parameters, tool data, etc.) are explained
with graphics. The switchover key (the key with three rotating
arrows at the left edge of the screen) allows you to switch between
the help graphics for internal and external machining (only for cycle
programming).
Simulation window
The simulation window shows a graphic representation of the
contour elements and a simulation of the tool movements. This
enables you to check cycles, entire cycle programs, and
DIN programs.
ICP contour graphics
Display of the contour during ICP programming.
DIN editing window
Display of the DIN program during DIN programming.
Error window
Display of occurred errors and warnings.

2.3 Operation and Data Input
Operating modes
The active mode of operation is highlighted in the operating-mode tab.
The CNC PILOT differentiates between the following operating
modes:
Machine—with the submodes:
Manual (display: “Machine”)
Teach-in (Teach-in mode)
Program Run
Programming—with the submodes:
smart.Turn
Simulation
ICP
Tool management—with the submodes:
Tool editor
Technology editor
Organization—with the submodes:
User parameters
Transfer
User login
You can use the operating mode keys to switch between the modes.
The selected submode and the current menu position remain during
the mode change.
If you press the operating mode key in a submode, the CNC PILOT
switches back to the main level of the mode.
At some places, a dialog has to be ended in order to switch

modes (e.g. in the tool editor).
Menu selection
The numerical keypad is used for activating a menu and for entering
data. They are displayed differently depending on the operating mode.
During setup, Teach-in mode etc., the functions are shown in a
9-field box, the menu window. The meaning of the selected
symbol / menu item is described in the footer.
In other operating modes, the keypad symbol is shown with the
position of the function marked (see figure).
Press the corresponding numerical key, or move the highlight with the
arrow keys to the symbol on the screen and press the ENT key.
Soft keys
With some system functions, the available functions are arranged
on several soft-key levels.
Some soft keys work like “toggle switches.” A function is active
when the associated field in the soft-key row is highlighted in color.
The setting remains in effect until the function is switched off again.
With functions like Take over position you do not have to enter
values manually. The data are automatically written into the
appropriate input fields.
Data entries are not concluded until the Save or Input finished soft
key has been pressed.
The Back soft key takes you back to the previous operating level.

Data input
Input windows comprise several input fields. You can move the
cursor to the desired input field with the vertical arrow keys. The CNC
PILOT shows the function of the selected field in the footer of the
window.
Place the highlight on the desired input field and enter the data.
Existing data are overwritten. With the horizontal arrow keys, you can
move the cursor within the input field and place it on the position
where you want to delete, copy or add characters.
To confirm the data you entered in a field, press a vertical arrow key
or the ENTER key.
If there are more input fields than a window can show, a second input
window is used. You will recognize this through the symbol in the
bottom line of the input window. To switch back and forth between
the windows, press the PG UP/PG DN keys.
Data entry is concluded when you press the OK or Input

finished or Save soft key. The Back or Cancel soft key
discards input or changes.
smart.Turn dialogs
The unit dialog is divided into fillable forms and the forms are divided
again into groups. The forms are identified by tabs and fine lines divide
each tab into groups. You can navigate between the forms and groups
with the smart keys.
smart keys
Go to the next form
Next/previous group
List operations
Cycle programs, DIN programs, tool lists, etc. are displayed as lists.
You can scroll through a list with the arrow keys to check data or to
highlight elements for operations like deleting, copying, editing, etc.
Alphanumeric keyboard
You enter letters and special characters with the screen keypad or (if
available) with a PC keyboard connected over the USB port.
Enter the text with the screen keyboard
Press the “Alphabetic keyboard” soft key or the GOTO key to enter
a text, for example a program name.
The CNC PILOT opens the "text entry" window.
Just as on a cell phone, you press the numerical keys a few times
to get the desired letters or special characters.
Wait until the selected character is transferred to the entry field
before you enter the next character.
Use the OK soft key to load the text into the open dialog field.
Use the abc/ABC soft key to select upper or lower case.
To delete individual characters, use the Backspace soft key.

2.4 Integrated Calculator
Calculator functions
The calculator can be selected only from open dialogs in cycle
programming or smart.Turn programming. You can use the calculator
in the following three views (see figures at right):
Scientific
Standard
Equation editor. Here you can type in multiple calculations in
immediate sequence (for example 17*3+5/9).
Using the calculator
8 Use the arrow keys to select the input field.
8 Use the CALC key to activate and deactivate the
calculator.
8 Shift the soft-key menu until the desired function
appears.
8 Perform the calculation.

8 Press the soft key. The CNC PILOT transfers the value
into the active input box and closes the calculator.
Switch the view of the calculator

8 Shift the soft-key menu until the VIEW soft key appears.
8 Press the View soft key until the desired view is set.
Mathematical function Shortcut (soft key)

Addition +
Subtraction -
Multiplication *
Division /
Calculations in parentheses ()
Arc cosine ARC
Sine SIN
Cosine COS
Tangent TAN
Powers of values X^Y
Square root SQRT
Mathematical function Shortcut (soft key)
Inversion 1/x
Pi (3.14159265359) PI
Add value to buffer memory M+
Save the value to buffer memory MS
Recall from buffer memory MR
Delete buffer memory contents MC
Natural logarithm LN
Logarithm LOG
Exponential function e^x
Check the algebraic sign SGN
Form the absolute value ABS
Truncate decimal places INT
Truncate places before the decimal point FRAC
Modulus operator MOD
Select view View
Delete value DEL
Unit of measure MM or INCH
Display mode for angle values DEG (degrees) or

RAD (radians)
Display mode of the numerical value DEC (decimal) or

HEX (hexadecimal)

Adjusting the position of the calculator
You can move the calculator as follows:
8 Shift the soft-key menu until the Additional
functions soft key appears.
8 Select "additional functions."
8 Position the calculator with the soft keys (see table at right)
Soft keys for positioning the calculator

Move window in the direction
of the arrow
Adjust the increment for movement
Move window to center
Back by one menu level
2.5 Types of Programs
2.5 Types of Programs
The CNC PILOT supports the following programs/contours: Program type Folders Extension
Teach-in programs (cycle programs) are used in the "Teach in" Teach-in programs "nc_prog\gtz" "*.gmz"
mode of operation. (cycle programs)
smart.Turn and DIN main programs are written in the smart.Turn
mode of operation. smart.Turn and DIN "nc_prog\ncps" "*.nc"
main programs
DIN subprograms are written in the smart.Turn operating mode
and are used in cycle programs and smart.Turn main programs. DIN subprograms "nc_prog\ncps" "*.ncs"
ICP contours are generated during Teach-in or Manual mode. The
extension depends on the contour described. ICP contours "nc_prog\gti"
In smart.Turn the contours are saved directly in the main program. Turning contours "*.gmi"
Contours of "*.gmr"
workpiece blanks
Contours on face "*.gms"
Lateral surface "*.gmm"

contours

2.6 The Error Messages
Displaying the error
The CNC PILOT generates error messages when it detects problems
such as:
Incorrect data input
Logical errors in the program
Contour elements that are impossible to machine
When an error occurs, it is displayed in red type in the header. Long
and multi-line error messages are displayed in abbreviated form. If an
error occurs in a background mode, the error symbol is shown in the
operating mode tab. Complete information on all pending errors is
shown in the error window.
If a rare “processor check error” should occur, the CNC PILOT
automatically opens the error window. You cannot remove such an
error. Shut down the system and restart the CNC PILOT.
The error message is displayed in the header until it is cleared or
replaced by a higher-priority error.
An error message that contains the block number of an NC program
was caused by an error in the indicated block or in the preceding block.
Opening the error window

8 Press the ERR key. The CNC PILOT opens the error
window and displays all accumulated error
messages.
Closing the error window

8 Press the END soft key—or
8 Press the ERR key. The CNC PILOT closes the error
window.
Detailed error messages
The CNC PILOT displays possible causes of the error and suggestions
for solving the problem:
Information on error causes and remedies:
8 Open the error window.
8 Position the cursor on the error message and press
the soft key. The CNC PILOT opens the window with
information on the error cause and corrective action.
8 To exit the info, press the Info soft key again.
“Details” soft key

The DETAILS soft key supplies information on the error message.
This information is only required if servicing is needed.
8 Position the cursor on the error message and press
the soft key. The CNC PILOT opens the window with
internal information about the error.
8 To leave Details, press the DETAILS soft key again.

Clearing errors
Clearing errors outside of the error window:
8 To clear the error/note in the header: Press the CE
button.
In some operating modes (such as the Editing mode), the

CE button cannot be used to clear the error, since the
button is reserved for other functions.
Clearing more than one error:

8 To delete individual errors: Position the cursor on the
error message and press the soft key.
8 To delete all errors: Press Delete all.
If the cause of the error has not been removed, the error
message cannot be deleted. In this case, the error
message remains in the window.
Error log file

The CNC PILOT stores errors and important events (e.g. system
startup) in an error log file. The capacity of the error log file is limited.
If the log file is full, it switches to the next one, etc. If the last log file
is full, the first one is overwritten by a new one, etc. If necessary,
switch the log file to see the history. The are 5 log files available.
8 Press the Log file soft key.
8 Open the log file.
8 Select previous log file, if needed.
8 Select current log file, if needed.
The oldest entry is at the beginning of the log file, and the most recent
entry is at the end.
Keystroke log file
The CNC PILOT stores keystrokes and important events (e.g. system
startup) in the keystroke log file. The capacity of the keystroke log file
is limited. If the log file is full, it switches to the next one, etc. If the
last log file is full, the first one is overwritten by a new one, etc. If
necessary, switch the log file to see the history. There are 10 log files
available.
8 Open the keystroke log file.
8 Open the log file.
8 Select previous log file, if needed.
8 Select current log file, if needed.
The CNC PILOT saves each key pressed during operation in the
keystroke log file. The oldest entry is at the beginning of the log file,
and the most recent entry is at the end.
Saving service files

If necessary, you can save the “Current status of the CNC PILOT,”
and make it available to a service technician for evaluation. A group of
service files is saved that contain information about the current status
of the machine and the machining. See “Service files” on page 480.
The information is summarized in a service files data record as a zip
file.
TNC:\SERVICEx.zip
The “x” designates a consecutive serial number. The CNC PILOT
always generates the service file with the number 1, and all existing
files are renamed to the numbers 2 to 5. An existing file with the
number 5 is deleted.
Saving service files:
8 Press the Service Files soft key.

60
Basics of Operation
Machine Mode of
Operation

3.1 Machine Mode of Operation
3.1 Machine Mode of Operation
The Machine mode of operation includes all functions for machine
setup, workpiece machining, and Teach-in program definition.
Machine setup: For preparations like setting axis values (defining
workpiece zero point), measuring tools or setting the protection
zone.
Manual mode: Machine a workpiece manually or
semi-automatically.
Teach-In mode: "Teach-in" a new cycle program, change an existing
program, or graphically simulate cycles.
Program run: Graphically simulate existing cycle programs or
smart.Turn programs and use them for the production of parts.
A Teach-in cycle is a machining step that has already been
programmed for you. This can be any machining operation from a
single cut through to a complex machining task like thread cutting. In
any case, a cycle is always a complete machining step that is
immediately executable once you have defined a few parameters that
describe the workpiece to be machined.
In Manual mode, the Teach-in cycles that you program are not stored.
In Teach-in mode, each machining step is executed with a cycle and
then stored and integrated into a complete Teach-in program. You
can subsequently use this Teach-in program in parts production by
repeating it as often as desired in the Program run mode.
In ICP programming, any contour can be defined using linear/circular
elements and transition elements (chamfers, rounding arcs,
undercuts). You include the contour description in ICP cycles (see
“ICP Contours” on page 320).
You write smart.Turn and DIN programs in the smart.Turn mode of
operation. The DIN programming feature provides your with
commands for simple traversing movements, DIN cycles for complex
machining tasks, switching functions, mathematical operations and
programming with variables.
You can either create “independent” programs that already contain all
necessary switching and traversing commands and are executed in
the Program Run mode, or program DIN subprograms that are
integrated in Teach-in cycles. The commands that you use in a DIN
subprogram depend on the job at hand. DIN subprograms support the
complete range of commands that is available for DIN programs.
You can also convert Teach-in programs to smart.Turn programs. This
enables you to make use of straightforward Teach-in programming,
and then convert the part program to DIN format for subsequent
optimization or completion.
62 Machine Mode of Operation

3.2 Switch-On / Switch-Off
Switch-on
The CNC PILOT displays the startup status. When the system has
completed all tests and initializations, it switches to the Machine
mode of operation. The tool display shows the tool that was last used.
If errors are encountered during system start, the control displays the
error symbol on the screen. You can check these error messages as
soon as the system is ready (see “The Error Messages” on page 56).
After system start, the CNC PILOT assumes that the tool
which was last used is still inserted in the tool holder. If
this is not the case, you must inform the control of the tool
change.
Monitoring EnDat encoders

If EnDat encoders are used, the control saves the axis positions during
switch-off. During switch-on, the CNC PILOT compares for each axis
the position during switch-on with the position saved during switch-
off.
If there is a difference, one of the following messages appears:
"S-RAM error: Saved position of the axis is invalid."
This message is correct if the control has been switched on for the
first time, or if the encoder or other control components involved
were exchanged.
"Axis was moved after power-off. Position difference: xx mm or
degrees"
Check the current position and confirm it if the axis was in fact
moved.
"HW parameter changed: Saved position of the axis is invalid."
This message is correct if configuration parameters were changed.
The cause for one of the above listed messages can also be a defect
in the encoder or control. Please contact your machine supplier if the
problem recurs.

Traversing the reference marks
Whether a reference run is necessary depends on the encoders used:
EnDat encoder: Reference run is not necessary.
Distance-coded encoders: The position of the axes is ascertained
after a short reference run.
Standard encoder: The axes move to known, machine-based points.
As soon as a reference mark is traversed, a signal is transmitted to
the control. The control knows the distance between the reference
mark and the machine zero point and can now establish the precise
position of the axis.
Reference run
Press the Z reference soft key
Press the X reference soft key
Or press all soft keys
Press Cycle start for the control to traverse the

reference marks
The CNC PILOT activates the position display and switches to the
main menu.
In case you traverse the reference marks separately for

the X and Z axes, you only traverse in either the X or the Z
axis.

Switch-off
Proper switch-off is recorded in the error log file.
Switch-off
Go to the main level of the Machine mode of

operation
Activate the error window

Press the MORE FUNCTIONS soft key
Press the OFF soft key
The CNC PILOT displays a confirmation request.
Press the Enter key or the YES soft key. The software
shuts down
Wait until the CNC PILOT requests you to switch off the machine.

3.3 Machine Data
3.3 Machine Data
Input of machine data
In Manual mode, you enter the information for tool, spindle speed and
feed rate/cutting speed in the TSF dialog box (Set T, S, F input
window). In Teach-in programs the tool information and technology
data are included in the cycle parameters, and in smart.Turn programs
they are part of the NC program.
In the T, S, F dialog box you also define the "maximum speed" and the
"stopping angle."
You can save the cutting data (cutting speed, feed rate) in the
technology database as a function of the workpiece material, the
tool's cutting material and the type of operation. With the Proposed
technology soft key the data are taken into the dialog.
The Tool list soft key opens the tool list (turret list). This list indicates
the current assignment of the tool carrier. There is a place in the table
for every tool holder. During setup, each tool (ID number) is assigned
to a tool holder.
If your machine is equipped with a driven tool, you use the
spindle-change key to select the spindle for which the your entries are
to apply. The selected spindle is indicated in the display. For this
reason there are two versions of the TSF dialog box:
Without driven tool (shown in upper figure): The parameters S, D
and A apply to the main spindle
With driven tool (shown in lower figure): The parameters S, D and
A apply to the selected spindle
Meaning of the parameters:
S: Spindle speed / constant speed
D: max. spindle speed
A: Stopping angle

3.3 Machine Data
Enter the tool data and technology data Soft keys for "Set T, S, F"
See “Tool compensation” on page 87.
Select Set T, S, F (only available in Manual mode)
See “Touch off” on page 84.
Define the parameters

Call the "tool list": Transfer of T number
from the tool list: See “Setting Up a Tool
Conclude data input. List” on page 72.
Transfer of cutting speed and feed rate

from the technology data
Caution. Depending on the machine, this operation might On: Feed per minute (mm/min)
cause the turret to turn. Off: Feed per revolution (mm/rev)
On: Constant speed (rpm)

Off: Constant surface speed (m/min)

3.3 Machine Data
Machine data display
Elements of machine data display
Position display X, Y, Z, W: Distance between tool tip and workpiece zero point
A black axis letter means the axis is enabled; white means it is not enabled.
Handwheel active Clamping active
Position display C: Position of the C axis

Empty box: C axis is not active
A black axis letter means the axis is enabled; white means it is not enabled.
Distance-to-go display X, Y, Z, W: The distance remaining from the current

position to the target position of the active traversing command
Distance-to-go and protection zone status: Distance-to-go display and display of

status of protective zone monitoring
Protective zone monitoring Protective zone monitoring

active not active
Position display for four axes: Display of position values for up to four axes. The
displayed axes depend on the machine configuration.
T number display
T number of the inserted tool
Tool compensation values
For all of T displays:
T highlighted in color indicates a driven tool
T number or ID highlighted in color indicates a mirrored tool holder
A letter X/Z of the compensation highlighted in color indicates that a special
compensation is active in the X/Z direction
T ID display
ID of the inserted tool
Tool compensation values
T ID display without compensation values

ID of the inserted tool

3.3 Machine Data
Tool compensation
Special compensation only for recessing tools or button tools
Special compensation value in gray means special compensation is not active
A letter X/Z of the compensation highlighted in color indicates that a special
compensation is active in the X/Z direction
Additive compensation
Compensation values in gray means D compensation is not active
Compensation values in black means D compensation is active
Tool life information

"T": Black=global tool life monitoring on; white=global tool life monitoring off
MT, RT active: Monitoring according to tool life
MZ, RZ active: Monitoring according to part quantity
All fields empty: Tool without tool-life monitoring
Slide display and cycle status

Upper field: Setting of the override control
Lower field with white background: Actual feed rate
Lower field with gray background: Programmed feed rate with stationary slide

Upper field: Programmed feed rate
Lower field: Actual feed rate

Middle field: Programmed feed rate
Lower field: Actual feed rate
Spindle display with spindle number, gear range and spindle status
Lower field: Actual speed or spindle position
For all of the spindle displays:
Spindle symbol: Black means the spindle is enabled; white means it is not.
Numeral in spindle symbol: Gear range
Numeral at right next to the spindle symbol: Spindle number
If a spindle key exists, the number of the selected spindle is highlighted in color.
Spindle status: See “Spindle” on page 71.
Display of the programmed speed in rpm or m/min
Display of the actual speed in rpm
If M19 is active and the machine tool builder has made the setting, when the
spindle is not turning, the display shows the spindle position instead of the
spindle speed.

3.3 Machine Data
Upper field: Programmed speed
Middle field: Programmed speed
Override display
Motor utilization: Utilization of the drive motor with respect to the rated torque
Digital axis and spindle motors
Analog axis and spindle motors, if set up by the machine tool builder
The machine data display is configurable. The machine

data that appear on your screen may therefore deviate
from the example shown.
Cycle statuses
The CNC PILOT shows the current cycle status with the cycle symbol Cycle symbols
(see table at right).
Status "Cycle ON"
Cycle or program execution is active.
Status "Cycle OFF"

Cycle or program execution is not active.
Axis feed rate

F is the identification letter for feed data. Depending on which mode
of the Feed rate soft key is active, data is entered in:
Millimeters per spindle revolution (feed per revolution)
Millimeters per minute (feed per minute).
On the screen, you can tell the type of feed rate from the unit of
measure in the input field.
You can change the feed value with the feed compensation
controller (feed override) (range: 0 % to 150 %).

3.3 Machine Data
Spindle
S is the identification letter for spindle data. Depending on which Spindle symbols (S display)
mode of the Constant speed soft key is active, data is entered in:
Direction of spindle rotation M3
Revolutions per minute (constant speed)
Meters per minute (constant surface speed).
The input range is limited by the maximum spindle speed. You define Direction of spindle rotation M4
the speed limitation in the Set T, S, F, dialog box or in DIN
programming with the G26 command. The speed limit remains in
effect until a new speed limit value is programmed. Spindle stopped
The speed compensation controller (speed override) allows you to
change the spindle speed (range: 50 % to 150 %).
Spindle position-controlled (M19)
If you are machining with a constant cutting speed, the
CNC PILOT calculates the spindle speed from the
position of the tool tip. The smaller the diameter of the C axis on spindle motor is active
tip, the higher the spindle speed. The maximum spindle
speed, however, is never exceeded.
The spindle symbols indicate the direction of spindle
Spindle designations
rotation as seen from the point of view of the machinist.
The spindle designation is fixed by the machine tool Spindle H 0 1
builder (see table at right).
Driven tool 1 1 2

3.4 Setting Up a Tool List
Machine with turret
The tools used are listed in the turret list. The ID number of the
mounted tool is assigned to every tool holder in the turret.
In the Teach-in cycle you program the turret position as T number.
The tool ID number is automatically entered under "ID."
The turret list can be set up through the TSF menu or directly from the
cycle dialogs in the Teach-in mode.
T turret pocket number
Tool ID (name) is entered automatically.
8 Open the Turret list. If the cursor is on the ID input
field, the CNC PILOT also automatically opens the
tool list with the entries in the tool database.
Machine with multifix

Machines with multifix tool holders have one tool pocket in which the
tools are changed manually.
T turret pocket number: always T1
Tool ID (name): Select the ID number from the tool list
8 Open the Tool list.
The turret and multifix tool systems can be used together

on one machine. The machine tool builder defines the
number of the multifix pocket.

Tools in different quadrants
Example: The principal tool carrier of your lathe is in front of the
workpiece (standard quadrant). An additional tool holder is behind
the workpiece.
When CNC PILOT is configured, it is defined for each tool holder
whether the X dimensions and the direction of rotation of circular arcs
are mirrored. In the above-mentioned example the additional tool
holder is assigned the attribute "mirrored."
If this method is used, all machining operations are programmed as
usual—regardless of which tool holder executes the operation. The
simulation also shows all machining operations in the standard
quadrant.
The tools are also described and dimensioned for the standard
quadrant—even if they are inserted in the additional tool holder.
Mirroring does not become effective until the machining of the
workpiece, i.e. when the additional tool holder is executing the
machining operation.

Filling the turret list from the database
The turret list indicates the current assignment of the tool carrier. The
turret list can be set up through the TSF menu or directly from the
cycle dialogs in the Teach-in mode.
Look at the entries in the tool database in order to move entries from
the database into the turret assignment list. The CNC PILOT displays
the database entries in the lower area of the screen. The cursor keys
are active in this list.
Transferring tools from the database
Press the Tool list soft key (when turret assignment

is open) to open the database.
Select the position in the turret assignment list.

Selecting and sorting entries in the tool
database
The CNC PILOT opens the soft-key
menu to select the desired tool type.
Sorts the tools in the displayed list as

Selecting and sorting entries in the tool database (see soft-key table at desired according to:
right)
Tool type
Tool ID
Use the cursor keys to select the entry in the tool database. Tool orientation
Each time the soft key is pressed it
changes to the next sorting mode.
Load the selected tool into the turret assignment list.
Switches between ascending and
descending sorting.
Not active here
Closes the tool list.

Filling the turret list
The turret assignment indicates the current assignment of the tool
carrier. When you set up a turret list, you enter the ID numbers of the
tools.
The turret list can be set up through the TSF menu or directly from the
cycle dialogs in the Teach-In mode. The desired turret pocket is
selected through the cursor keys.
Setting up a tool list
Initiate the cycle dialog
Press the Tool list soft key to activate the turret Soft keys in turret list
assignment table.
Delete entry
Adapt the turret assignment (see soft-key table at right).

Paste entry from clipboard
Cut out entry and save it in the clipboard
Show entries in the tool database
Switch to next menu
Delete the complete turret list
Back by one menu level
Load the T number and the tool ID

number into the TSF or cycle dialog
Close the turret list without loading the T

number and tool ID into the dialog box.
Changes in the turret list remain
effective.

Tool call
T is the identification letter for the tool holder. ID designates the tool
ID number. The tool is called by "T" (turret pocket number). The ID
number ID is shown and automatically filled in the dialogs. A turret list
is kept.
In manual operation, you enter the T number in the TSF dialog box. In
Teach-in mode, “T” and “ID” are cycle parameters.
If a T number is entered in the TSF dialog box with an ID

number that is not defined in the turret list, then the turret
list will be changed accordingly.
Driven tools
Driven tools are defined in the tool description.
The driven tool can be operated with feed per revolution if the tool
spindle drive is equipped with a rotary encoder.
If driven tools are used with constant cutting speed, the spindle
speed is calculated from the tool diameter.

Tool life monitoring
If desired, you can have the CNC PILOT monitor tool life or the number
of parts that are produced with a specific tool.
The tool life monitoring function adds the time a tool is used at feed
rate. The quantity monitoring counts the number of finished parts. The
count is compared with the entry in the tool data.
As soon as the tool life expires or the programmed quantity is reached,
the CNC PILOT generates an error message and stops program
execution after the end of the program. If you are working with
program repeats (M99 in DIN programs), the system is stopped after
execution of the current repeat.
For Teach-in programs, the simple tool life monitoring is available.
Here CNC PILOT informs you when a tool is worn out.
In smart.Turn and DIN PLUS programs, you have the choice
between the simple tool life monitoring or the tool life
monitoring with replacement tools option. If you use
replacement tools, the CNC PILOT automatically inserts the "sister
tool" as soon as the tool is worn-out. The CNC PILOT does not stop
the program run until the last tool of the tool sequence of exchange
is worn out.
You activate/deactivate the tool life management in the parameter
"System/General settings for automatic operation/user parameter tool
life."
The type of monitoring data, the "tool life/remaining tool life" or the
"maximum number of pieces/remaining number of pieces" are
managed in the tool data. They are also edited and displayed in the tool
data (see “Editing tool-life data” on page 439).
You can define replacement tools when setting up the turret. The
"interchange chain" can contain more than one replacement tool. The
interchange chain is part of the NC program (see chapter titled "Tool
Programming" in the "smart.Turn and DIN Programming" User's
Manual.)
You must update the data on tool life and number of

pieces in the "tool management" mode when you replace
the insert of a tool.

3.5 Machine Setup
3.5 Machine Setup
The machine always requires a few preparations, regardless of
whether you are machining a workpiece manually or automatically. In
Manual mode the following functions are subitems of the Setup menu
item:
Setting the axis values (defining workpiece zero point)
Machine reference (axis reference run)
Setting the protection zone
Defining the tool change position
Setting C-axis values
Defining the workpiece zero point
In the dialog, the distance between the machine zero point and the
workpiece zero point (also know as offset) is shown as XN and ZN. If
the workpiece zero point is changed, the display values will be
changed accordingly.
Workpiece datum setting
Select Setting up
Select Set axis values
Touch the workpiece zero point (end face)

Define this point as the "workpiece zero point Z"
Enter the distance between the tool and the workpiece zero point as
"measuring point coordinate Z"
The CNC PILOT calculates the workpiece zero
point Z
Machine zero point Z = workpiece zero point Z

(offset = 0)
This makes it possible to enter the zero point shift

directly in ZN

3.5 Machine Setup
Homing the axes
It is possible to home axes that have already been homed. Here you
can select individual axes or all axes simultaneously.
Reference run
Select Setting up
Select Set axis values
Select the Machine reference soft key
Press the Z reference soft key
Press the X reference soft key
Or press all soft keys
Press Cycle start for the control to traverse the

reference marks
The CNC PILOT refreshes the position display.

3.5 Machine Setup
Setting the protection zone
With active protection zone monitoring, the CNC PILOT checks for
every movement whether the protection zone in –Z direction would
be damaged. If it detects such a violation, it stops the axis movement
and generates an error message.
The "Setting the protection zone" setup dialog shows the distance
between the machine zero point and the protection zone in –ZS.
The status of the protection zone monitoring is shown in the machine
display if it has been configured by the machine manufacturer (see
table).
Setting the protection zone/switching off the monitoring
function
Select Setting up
Protection zone status

Select Set protection zone Protective zone monitoring active
Protective zone monitoring not active

Move the tool with the jog keys or handwheel until it reaches the
protection zone
Use the Take over position soft key to load this
position as protection zone
Enter the position of the protection zone relative to the workpiece zero
point (field: "Meas. pt. coordin.–Z")
Use the Save soft key to load the entered position as
protection zone
Switch off protective zone monitoring
Protective zone monitoring is not active if the Set

protect zone dialog box is open.
In DIN programming, you deactivate protective zone
monitoring with G60 Q1 and reactivate it with G60.

3.5 Machine Setup
With the cycle Move to tool change position or the DIN command
G14, the slide moves to the tool change point. Program the tool
change point far enough away from the workpiece so that the turret
can rotate without collision and the tools do not damage the
workpiece during tool change.
Select Setting up
Select the tool change point
Move to the tool change position

Move to the tool change point using the jog keys or
the handwheel and load this position as tool change
point
Enter the tool change position directly

Enter the desired tool change position in the X and Y input fields in
machine coordinates (X = radius dimension).
The coordinates of the tool change position are entered

and displayed as the distance between machine zero point
and tool carrier zero point. It is recommended to move to
the tool change point and load the position with the Take
over position soft key.

3.5 Machine Setup
Setting C-axis values
Defining the zero point of the C axis
Select Setting up
Select Set C axis values
Position the C axis

Define the position as the C axis zero point
Enter the zero point shift of the C axis:

Confirm entry for CNC PILOT to calculate the C axis
zero point
Delete the zero point shift of the C axis

3.6 Tool Measurement
The CNC PILOT supports tool calibration
By touch-off. The setup dimensions are determined by comparing a
tool with an already measured tool.
By touch probe (stationary of swiveling in the working space;
installed by the machine tool builder).
By optical gauge (installed by the machine tool builder).
Calibration by touch-off is always available. If a touch probe or an
optical gauge is installed, select these measuring methods by soft
key.
If the tool dimensions are already known, you can enter the setup
dimensions directly in the "tool management" mode of operation.
The compensation values are deleted during tool

measurement.
Please note that for drilling and milling tools the center
is measured.
The tools' type and orientation determine how they are
measured. Note the help graphics.

Touch off
You measure the dimensions relative to a calibrated tool by "touching
the tool off."
Finding the tool dimensions by touch-off with the tool
In the tool table, enter the tool you want to measure
Insert the reference tool and enter the T number in

the TSF dialog box
Turn an end face and define this coordinate as the workpiece zero
point
Return to the TSF dialog box and insert the tool to be

measured
Activate Measure tool
Touch the face with the tool

Enter the value 0 for the measuring point coordinate
Z (workpiece zero point) and save it
Turn a measuring diameter

Enter the diameter value as measuring point
coordinate X and save it
For turning tools, enter the cutting edge radius and

load it into the tool table

Touch probe (table-mounted)
Finding the tool dimensions by using a touch probe
Insert a measured tool and enter the T number in the

TSF dialog box
Activate touch probe
Pre-position the tool for the first direction of measurement
Set the positive or negative traverse direction
Press the soft key for this direction (e.g. Z direction)
Press Cycle START. The tool moves in the direction

of measurement. When it contacts the touch probe,
the control calculates and saves the set-up
dimensions. The tool returns to the starting point.
Pre-position the tool for the second direction of measurement
Press the soft key for this direction (e.g. X direction)
Press Cycle START. The tool moves in the direction

of measurement. When it contacts the touch probe,
the control calculates and saves the set-up
dimensions.


Optical gauge
Finding the tool dimensions by using an optical gauge
Insert a measured tool and enter the T number in the

TSF dialog box
Activate optical gauge
Position the tool at the cross hairs of the optical gauge by using the jog
keys or the handwheel
Save the tool dimension in Z
Save the tool dimension in Z


Tool compensation
The tool compensation in X and Z as well as the special compensation
for recessing tools and button tools compensate for wear of the
cutting edge.
A compensation value must not exceed +/–10 mm.
Defining tool compensation
Press the Tool correct. soft key
Press Tool corr. in X (or Tool corr. in Z)

The compensation values that you determine per
handwheel are now shown in the distance-to-go
display
Transfer the compensation value to the tool table

The T display shows the new compensation value
The distance-to-go display is canceled
Deleting tool compensation values
Press the Tool correct. soft key
Press the Delete soft key
Delete compensation value in X (or Z)

3.7 "Manual Operation" Operating Mode
3.7 "Manual Operation" Operating
Mode
With manual workpiece machining, you move the axes with the
handwheels or manual direction keys. You can also use Teach-in
cycles for machining more complex contours (semi-automatic mode).
The paths of traverse and the cycles, however, are not stored.
After switch-on and traversing the reference marks, the CNC PILOT is
always in Manual mode. This mode remains active until you select
Teach-in or Program Run. "Machine" displayed in the header indicates
that you are in Manual mode.
Define the workpiece zero point and enter the machine

data before you start machining.
Tool change
Enter the T number/tool ID in the Set T, S, F dialog box. Check the
tool parameters.
T0 does not define a tool. This also means that it does not contain any
data on tool length, cutting radius, etc.
Spindle
Enter the spindle speed in the Set T, S, F dialog box. To start and
stop spindle rotation, press the spindle keys on the machine operating
panel. The stopping angle A in the TSF dialog box makes the spindle
always stop at this position.
Pay attention to the maximum speed (can be defined with

TSF dialog box).
Handwheel operation
Refer to the machine manual.

3.7 "Manual Operation" Operating Mode
Manual direction keys
With the manual direction keys, you can move the axes at the
programmed feed rate or at rapid traverse. Enter the feed rate in the
TSF dialog box.
Feed rate
If the spindle is rotating: feed per revolution [mm/
rev]
If the spindle is not rotating: feed per minute [m/
min]
Feed rate in rapid traverse : feed per minute [m/min]
Teach-in cycles in Manual mode

8 Set the spindle speed
8 Set the feed rate
8 Insert tool, define T number and check tool data (T0 is not permitted)
8 Approach cycle start point
8 Select the cycle and enter cycle parameters
8 Graphically check the cycle run
8 Run the cycle
The entries last made in a cycle dialog remain in memory

until a new cycle is selected.

3.8 Teach-in Mode
3.8 Teach-in Mode
Teach-in mode
In the Teach-in mode you machine a workpiece step by step with the
help of Teach-in cycles. The CNC PILOT "memorizes" how the
workpiece was machined and stores the working steps in a cycle
program, which you can call up again at any time. The Teach-in mode
can be switched on by soft key and is displayed in the header.
Each Teach-in program is given a name and a short description. The
individual cycles of a cycle program are listed as blocks and are
numbered in ascending order. The block number has no meaning for
the program run. The cycles are run after each other. When the cursor
is located on a cycle block, CNC PILOT displays the cycle parameters.
The cycle block contains:
Block number
Tool used (turret pocket number and tool ID)
Cycle designation
Number of ICP contour or of DIN subprogram (after "%")
Programming teach-in cycles

When creating a new Teach-in program, you program each cycle in the Soft keys
following sequence of actions “Enter—Simulate—Execute—Save.”
The individual cycles form the cycle program. Switch to the “select cycle programs”
function.
You can change Teach-in programs by simply editing the necessary
cycle parameters, and delete or add cycles as required.
Renumber the block numbers of the
When you exit the Teach-in mode or switch off the machine, the cycles.
Teach-in program remains as it was programmed or edited.
Enter/edit the program description. Open
When you call an ICP cycle, the control displays a soft key for
the alphabetic keyboard.
switching to the ICP contour editor (see “ICP Editor in Cycle Mode”
on page 323).
Delete the selected cycle.
DIN subprograms are programmed in the smart.Turn editor and then
integrated in a DIN cycle. You can use either the DIN edit soft key to
go into the smart.Turn editor when you select the DIN cycle, or the
Copy the cycle parameters into a buffer
operating-mode key.
memory. (Example: Adopt the
parameters of the roughing cycle for the
finishing cycle).
Transferring cutting data from the tool

memory. (Soft key appears only after Copy
cycle.)
Change the cycle parameter or mode. The

cycle type, however, cannot be changed.
Insert a new cycle below the highlighted

block.

3.9 Program Run Mode
Loading a program
In Program Run mode, you use Teach-in programs and DIN programs
for parts production. You cannot change the programs in this mode.
The graphic simulation feature, however, allows you to check the
programs before you run them. The CNC PILOT also offers the Single
Block and the Continuous Run mode with which you can machine step
by step the first workpiece of a whole batch.
The smart.Turn programs are selected as DIN programs (*.nc).
Program Run automatically loads the most recently used program. To
load another program, proceed as follows:
Load the Teach-in program or NC program
Open the program list—the CNC PILOT displays the

Teach-in programs
Display the DIN program
Select the Teach-in program or DIN program
Display the DIN program
You can start a Teach-in or smart.Turn program at any desired block to

resume a machining operation after an interruption (mid-program
startup).
The Program Run mode can be switched on with the soft key and is
displayed in the header.
If you press Program Run, the CNC PILOT reads in the program that
was last active in this mode or in the editing mode. Alternately, you
can select another program with Program list (see “Program
Management” on page 100).

Comparing a tool list
While a program is being loaded, the CNC PILOT compares the current
tools in the turret with the tool list of the program. If tools are used in
the program that are not in the current turret list or are located in
another pocket, an error message is displayed.
After the error message is confirmed, the program-dependent tool list
is shown for checking.
You can transfer the programmed tool table with the Load tool soft
key, or to cancel the program selection with Cancel.
Danger of collision!
Load the programmed tool list only if it matches the
actual turret assignment.
A program start is not possible unless the programmed
tool list matches the turret list that was set up.
Before executing a program

Faulty programs
The CNC PILOT checks the programs during loading up to the
MACHINING section. If it detects an error (for example, an error in the
contour description), it displays the error symbol in the screen
headline. You can then press the Info key for detailed information on
the error.
The machining section of a program and therefore all traverse is not
interpreted until after Cycle on. If there is an error here, the machine
stops with an error message.
Testing the cycles and cycle parameters
The CNC PILOT displays the Teach-in program or the DIN program
in the list window. With Teach-in programs, the parameters of the
cycle on which the cursor is placed are displayed.
Graphic control
You can monitor program run with the graphic simulation feature
(see “Simulation Mode of Operation” on page 418).
Before starting the program, check it in the simulation to
find errors in the programming or the syntax used.

Finding a start block
Mid-program startup means entering into an NC program at a selected
point. In smart.Turn programs you can start the program at any
NC block.
The CNC PILOT starts program run from the cursor position. The
starting position is not changed by a previous graphic simulation.
The selected NC block is the first block run after the mid-program
startup. In the search for a start block, the CNC PILOT brings the
machine into the situation in which it would be in a normal program run
just before the startup block. First the tool is selected, then the axes
are positioned in the configured sequence, and finally the spindle is
switched on.
The CNC PILOT must be prepared by the machine tool

builder for the mid-program startup function (PLC).
HEIDENHAIN recommends starting at an NC block
immediately after a T command.
Please note:
Position the slide with the following conditions:
The turret can tilt without collision.
The axes must be able to move to the last
programmed position without collision.
If a T command is used as the starting block, the turret
moves first to the previous tool and then to the tool
selected in the starting block.

Program execution
The selected Teach-in or DIN program is executed as soon as you Soft keys
press Cycle start. You can interrupt machining at any time by pressing
Cycle stop. Select Teach-in program or smart.Turn
program.
During program run, the cycle (or DIN block) that is presently being
executed is highlighted. With Teach-in programs, the parameters of
Teach-in program:
the cycle currently being run are displayed in the input window.
On: Cycles are run continuously, one
You can influence the program run with the soft keys listed in this
after the other, up to the next tool
table.
change to be acknowledged.
Off: Stop after every cycle. Start the
following cycle with Cycle start.
smart.Turn program:
On: Program execution without any
interruption.
Off: Stop before command M01.
On: The simulation stops after each

path of traverse (basic block) Start the
next path: Cycle start.
(Recommendation: Single block should
be used together with the basic-block
display.)
Off: Cycles / DIN commands are
executed without any interruption
Input of tool compensation values or

additive correction values, see “Entering
compensation values during program
run” on page 95
Switch the graphic simulation on.
On: The traversing and switching

commands are shown in DIN format
(basic blocks).
Off: Teach-in or DIN program is
displayed.
The cursor returns to the first block of the

Teach-in program or DIN program.

Entering compensation values during program
run
Tool compensation
Entering tool compensation values
Activate the tool compensation
Enter the tool number or select a tool from the tool list
Enter the compensation values
Press the Save soft key for the valid compensation

data to be displayed in the input window and saved
Entered values are added to the existing compensation

values and are effective immediately.
To delete a compensation, enter the current
compensation value with the opposite algebraic sign.

Additive compensation
The CNC PILOT manages 16 additive compensation values. You edit
the compensation values in the Program Run mode and activate it with
G149 in a smart.Turn program or in ICP finishing cycles.
Entering additive compensation values
Activate the additive compensation
Enter the number of the additive compensation
Enter the compensation values
Press the Save soft key for the valid compensation

data to be displayed in the input window and saved
Reading additive compensation values
Place the cursor in the next input field—CNC PILOT displays the valid
compensation values

Deleting additive compensation values

Press the Delete soft key—these compensation
values are deleted
Press the Delete all soft key—all compensation

values are deleted
Entered values are added to the existing compensation

values and are effective immediately.
The compensation values are saved in an internal table
and are available in any program.
Delete all additive compensation values when you set
up the machine again.

Program execution in “dry run” mode
The dry run mode is used for fast program execution up to a point at
which machining is to resume. The prerequisites for a dry run are:
The CNC PILOT must be prepared by the machine tool builder for
dry run. (The function is activated with a keylock switch or a key.)
The Program Run mode must be activated.
In dry run, all feed paths (except thread cuts) are traversed at the rapid
rate. You can reduce the traversing speed with the feed rate override.
Do not use the dry run feature for anything other than “cutting air.”
When dry run is activated, the spindle status or spindle speed is
“frozen.” After deactivation of the dry run, the CNC PILOT returns to
the programmed feed rates and spindle speeds.
Use the dry run feature only to “cut air.”

3.10 Graphic Simulation
3.10 Graphic Simulation
The graphic simulation feature enables you to check the machining
sequence, the proportioning of cuts and the finished contour before
actual machining.
In the Manual and Teach-in modes, this function simulates the
execution of a single Teach-in cycle—in Program Run mode it
simulates a complete Teach-in cycle or DIN program.
A programmed workpiece blank is displayed in the simulation
graphics. The CNC PILOT also simulates machining operations that
are executed with a traversable spindle or the C axis on the face or
lateral surface. This allows you to check the complete machining
process.
In Manual mode and Teach-in mode, the Teach-in cycle you are
currently working on is simulated. In the Program Run mode the
simulation begins starting with the cursor position. smart.Turn and
DIN programs are simulated from program start.
For more details on the use and operation of the simulation, refer to
the chapter “Simulation Mode of Operation” on page 418.

3.11 Program Management
Program selection
Program Run automatically loads the most recently used program.
In the program selection the programs available in the control are
listed. You select the desired program, or use the ENTER key to go to
the File name input field. In this input field you limit the selection or
enter the program name directly.
8 Open the program list. Use the soft keys for program
selection and sorting (see following table).
Soft keys in the program selection dialog

Display of file attributes: size, date, time
Switching between Teach-in and DIN/smart.Turn

programs
Opens the program organization soft-key menu (see

page 101)
Opens the sorting functions soft-key menu (see

following table)
Opens the alphabetic keyboard (see “Alphanumeric

keyboard” on page 51)
Opens the program for the automatic start
Closing the program selection dialog box. The program

previously active in the Program Run mode remains
effective.
Soft keys for sorting functions

Display of file attributes: size, date, time
Sorts the programs by file name
Sorts the programs by file size
Sorts the programs by change date

Soft keys for sorting functions
Reversal of the sorting direction
Opens the program for the automatic start
Return to program selection dialog
Program organization
With the functions of the program organization you can copy, delete
and otherwise manipulate program files. You can select the program
type (Teach-in programs, smart.Turn or DIN programs) before calling
the program organization.
Soft keys for organization

Deletes the selected program after asking
Makes it possible to change the program name
Copies the selected program
Switches the write protection attribute on or off for

the selected program
Opens the alphabetic keyboard (see “Alphanumeric

keyboard” on page 51)
Return to program selection dialog

3.12 Conversion into DIN Format
3.12 Conversion into DIN Format
The Convert to DIN function enables you to convert a Teach-in
program to a smart.Turn program with the same functionality. You can
then optimize, expand such a smart.Turn program, etc.
Making a conversion
Conversion into DIN format
Press the Cycle program --> DIN soft key (in the main
menu)
Select the program to be converted
Press Cycle program --> DIN soft key (program

selection menu)
The generated DIN program has the same program name as the
Teach-in program.
Should the CNC PILOT encounter any errors during conversion, it
generates an error message and cancels conversion.
If a program with the name used is open in the smart.Turn editor, the
conversion is canceled with an error message.

3.13 Units of Measure
The CNC PILOT is operating in either the metric or inch system. The
units and decimal places in the displays are given and entries
interpreted according to the units of measure.
Inch Metric
Units of measure
Coordinates, lengths, path data inch mm
Feed rate in./rev or in./min mm/rev or mm/

min
Cutting speed ft/min m/min
Number of decimal places in displays and input
Coordinate data and path data 4 3
Compensation values 5 3
The inch/metric setting is also evaluated for the displays and entries in
Tool management.
Make the metric/inch setting in the user parameter "System/Definition
of unit of measure in effect for display" (Page 467). Changed metric/
inch settings become effective immediately, with no need for a
restart.
The basic block display also switches to inches.
The unit is defined in all NC programs, Metric programs

can be run with an active inch mode and vice versa.
New programs are made with the selected unit.
Refer to your machine manual if you want to know
whether and how the handwheel resolution can be set
to inches.


Teach-in Mode

4.1 Working with Teach-in Cycles
Before you can use the cycles, you must set the workpiece zero point
and ensure that the tools you are going to use are described. You enter
the machine data (tool, feed rate, spindle speed) in Teach-in mode
together with the other cycle parameters. In Manual mode, you must
program these machine data before calling a cycle.
The cutting data can be taken from the technology

database using the Proposed technology soft key. For this
database access, a type of operation is permanently
assigned to every cycle.
Define the individual cycles as follows:

Position the tool tip with the handwheel or the jog keys to the
starting point of the cycle (only in Manual mode).
Select and program a cycle.
Graphically test the cycle.
Execute the cycle.
Save the cycle (only in Teach-in mode).
Cycle starting point

In Manual mode, cycles are executed from the "current tool position."
In Teach-in mode, you enter the starting point as one of the
parameters. The CNC PILOT moves to this position at rapid traverse
by the shortest path (diagonal) before executing the cycle.
If the tool cannot approach the next starting point on the
shortest path without colliding with the workpiece, you
must define an auxiliary position with the Rapid traverse
positioning cycle.
106 Teach-in Mode

Help graphics
The functions and parameters of the Teach-in cycles are illustrated in
the graphic support window. These graphics usually show an external
machining operation.
8 The Circle key allows you to switch between the
help graphics for internal and external machining.
Elements used in the graphic support window:

Broken line: Rapid traverse path
Continuous line: Feed path
Dimension line with arrow head on one side: "Directional
dimension"—the algebraic sign defines the direction
Dimension line with arrow head on both sides: "Absolute
dimension"—the algebraic sign has no effect.
DIN macros
DIN macros (DIN cycles) are DIN subprograms (see “DIN cycle” on
page 317). You can integrate DIN macros in Teach-in programs. Make
sure that the DIN macros do not contain any zero point shifts.
Teach-in programming: With DIN macros, the zero point
shift is reset at the end of the cycle. Therefore, do not use
any DIN macros with zero point shifts in Teach-in
programming.
Graphical test run (simulation)

Before executing a cycle, you can graphically test the contour details
and the machining sequence (see “Simulation Mode of Operation” on
page 418).
Cycle keys
A programmed Teach-in cycle is not executed until Cycle start is
pressed. Cycle stop interrupts a running program. During thread
cutting, with a cycle stop the tool is lifted off the contour and then
stopped. The cycle has to be restarted.
During a cycle interruption you can:
Resume cycle execution with Cycle start. The control will always
resume execution of the cycle at the point of interruption—even if
you have moved the axes in the meantime.
Move the axes with the manual direction keys or the handwheel.
Terminate the machining process with the Back soft key.

Switching functions (M functions)
The CNC PILOT generates all switching functions that are necessary
for running a cycle.
The direction of spindle rotation must be defined in the tool
parameters. Using the tool parameters, the cycles generate spindle
trigger functions (M3 or M4).
Your machine manual provides further information on

automatically triggered switching functions.
Comments
You may assign a comment to an existing Teach-in cycle. The
comment is inserted in brackets "[...]" below the cycle.
ADDING OR EDITING COMMENTS
Create/select a cycle
Press the Change text soft key
Press the Goto key to show the alphabetic keyboard
Enter the comment with the on-screen alphanumeric keyboard
Transfer the comment
108 Teach-in Mode

Cycle menu
The main menu shows the cycle groups (see table below). Once a
cycle group has been selected, the soft keys for the individual cycles
appear.
You can use ICP cycles for complex contours, and DIN macros for
technologically sophisticated machining operations. In cycle
programs, the names of the ICP contours or DIN macros are at the end
of the line of the cycle.
Some cycles offer optional parameters. That means, specific
contour elements will only be machined if you set the corresponding
parameters. The identification letters for optional parameters and
parameters that are preassigned default values are displayed in gray.
The following parameters are only required in Teach-in mode:
Starting point X, Z
Machine data S, F, T and ID
Cycle groups Menu key

Workpiece blank
Define standard workpiece blank or workpiece
blank with ICP
Single cuts
Position at rapid traverse, linear and circular single
cuts, chamfers, and rounding arcs
Turning cycles, longitudinal/transverse

Turning and finishing cycles for turning and facing
Recessing and recess-turning cycles

Cycles for recessing, contour recessing,
undercuts and parting
Thread cutting
Thread cycles, relief turns and thread repair
Drilling
Drilling cycles and patterns for face and
lateral-surface machining
Milling
Milling cycles and patterns for face and
lateral-surface machining
DIN macros
Including DIN macros

Soft keys in cycle programming: Depending on the type of cycle,
you define the variants of the cycle by soft key (see table below).
Soft keys in cycle programming

Call the interactive contour input
Activate spindle positioning (M19)
On: Tool returns to the cycle start point

Off: Tool remains at cycle end position
Switch to the finishing operation
Switch to the expanded mode
Open the turret list and tool list. You can load the tool
from the list.
Load the actual positions X and Z in Teach-in mode
Accept the proposed values for feed rate and cutting

velocity from the database
On: Constant speed (rpm)

Off: Constant surface speed (m/min)
Linear drilling or milling pattern on face or lateral surface
Circular drilling or milling pattern on face or lateral surface
Transfer entered/changed values
Cancel the current dialog
110 Teach-in Mode

Addresses used in many cycles
Safety clearance G47
Safety clearances are used for approaching and departing paths. If the
cycle run takes a safety clearance into account during execution you
will find the address "G47" in the dialog. Proposed value: See (safety
clearance G47) Page 467.
Safety clearances SCI and SCK

The safety clearances SCI and SCK are considered for approach and
departure paths in drilling and milling cycles.
SCI = Safety clearance in the working plane
SCK = Safety clearance in infeed direction
Proposed value: See (safety clearance G147) Page 467.
Tool change point G14

With the address G14, at the end of the cycle you program a
movement of the slide to the tool change position (see “Defining the
tool change position” on page 81). You can influence the approach to
the tool change position as follows:
No axis (do not approach the tool change position)
0: Simultaneous (default)
1: First X, then Z
2: First Z, then X
3: Only X
4: Only Z
Cutting limit SX, SZ

With the addresses SX and SZ you limit the contour area to be
machined in the X and Z direction. Seen from the tool position at the
beginning of the cycle, the contour to be machined is truncated at
these positions.
Additive compensation Dxx

With the address Dxx you activate an additive compensation for the
entire cycle run. The xx stands for the compensation numbers 1 to 16.
The additive compensation is switched off at cycle end.

4.2 Workpiece Blank Cycles
The workpiece blank cycles describe the workpiece blank

and the setup used. The workpiece blank cycles do not
influence the machining process.
The contours of workpiece blanks are shown during the
simulation of the machining process.
There is no contour follow-up in Teach-in programs. The

cycles calculate the area to be machined from the starting
position. If you need the contour follow-up function, use
smart.Turn with blank and finished part description.
Workpiece blank Symbol

Bar/tube blank
Define the standard blank
ICP workpiece blank contour

Free workpiece blank description with
ICP
112 Teach-in Mode

Bar/tube blank
Select define the blank
Select bar/tube blank
The cycle describes the workpiece blank and the setup used. This
information is evaluated during the simulation.
Cycle parameters
X Outside diameter
Z Length, including transverse allowance and clamping range
I Inside diameter for workpiece blank "tube"
K Right edge (transverse allowance)
B Clamping range
J Clamp type
0: Not clamped
1: Externally clamped
2: Internally clamped

ICP workpiece blank contour
Select define the blank
Select ICP workpiece blank contour
The cycle integrates the workpiece blank defined with ICP and
describes the setup used. This information is evaluated during the
simulation.
Cycle parameters
X Clamp diameter
Z Clamping position in Z
B Clamping range
J Clamp type
0: Not clamped
1: Externally clamped
2: Internally clamped
RK ICP contour number
114 Teach-in Mode

4.3 Single Cut Cycles
In the single-cut cycles you position the tool in rapid

traverse, perform linear or circular cuts, machine
chamfers or rounding arcs, and enter M functions.
Single cuts Symbol

Rapid traverse positioning
Linear machining, longitudinal/

transverse
Single longitudinal/transverse cut
Linear machining at angle

Single oblique cut
Circular machining
Single circular cut (for cutting
direction, see menu key)
Machine a chamfer
Machine a rounding
Call an M function

Call the single-cut menu
Select rapid traverse positioning
The tool moves at rapid traverse from the starting point to the target
point.
Cycle parameters
X, Z Starting point
X2, Z2 Target point
T Turret pocket number
ID Tool ID number
MT M after T: M function that is executed after the tool call T
MFS M at beginning: M function that is executed at the
beginning of the machining step
MFE M at end: M function that is executed at the end of the
machining step
116 Teach-in Mode

Approach the tool change position
Activate the T-Change approach soft key
The tool moves at rapid traverse from the current position to the tool
change position (see page 111).
After reaching the tool change position, the control switches to the
tool indicated in "T."
Cycle parameters
G14 Sequence (default: 0)
0: Simultaneous (diagonal path of traverse)
1: First X, then Z direction
2: First Z, then X direction
3: X direction only
4: Z direction only
ID Tool ID number
machining step

Linear machining, longitudinal
Select longitudinal linear machining
Off: When the cycle is completed, the tool remains

at the cycle end position
On: Tool returns to the starting point
Longitudinal linear machining

The tool moves from the starting point to the contour end point Z2 at
the programmed feed rate and remains at the cycle end position.
Contour linear, longitudinal (with return)
The tool approaches the workpiece, executes the longitudinal cut and
returns to the starting point at the end of cycle (see figures).
Cycle parameters
X, Z Starting point
X1 Starting point of contour (if "With return" is active)
Z2 Contour end point
G14 Tool change point (if "With return" is active)
ID Tool ID number
S Rotational speed/cutting speed
F Feed per revolution
machining step
Type of machining for technology database access: Finishing

Cycle execution if "With return" is active
1 Move from the starting point to the contour starting point X1
2 Move to contour end point Z2 at the programmed feed rate.
3 Retract and return on paraxial path to starting point
118 Teach-in Mode

Linear machining, transverse
Select transverse linear machining

Transverse linear machining

The tool moves from the starting point to the contour end point X2 at
the programmed feed rate and remains at the cycle end position.
Contour linear, transverse (with return)
The tool approaches the workpiece, executes the transverse cut and
returns to the starting point at the end of cycle (see figures).
Cycle parameters
X, Z Starting point
Z1 Starting point of contour (if "With return" is active)
X2 Contour end point
ID Tool ID number
machining step

1 Move from the starting point to the contour starting point Z1
2 Move to contour end point X2 at the programmed feed rate

Select linear machining at angle


The CNC PILOT calculates the target position and moves the tool on a
straight line from the starting point to the target position at the
programmed feed rate. When the cycle is completed, the tool remains
at the cycle end position.
Contour linear, at angle (with return)
The CNC PILOT calculates the target position. The tool then
approaches the workpiece, executes the linear cut and returns to the
starting point at the end of cycle (see figures). Cutter radius
compensation is taken into account.
Cycle parameters
X, Z Starting point
X1, Z1 Starting point of contour (if "With return" is active)
X2, Z2 Contour end point
A Starting angle (range: –180° < A < 180°)
G47 Safety clearance (if "With return" is active)
ID Tool ID number
machining step

Parameter combinations for defining the target point: see help graphic
120 Teach-in Mode

1 Calculate the target position
2 Move from the starting point to the contour starting point
X1, Z1
3 Move to target position at programmed feed rate

Circular machining
Select circular machining (counterclockwise)
Select circular machining (clockwise)

Circular machining
The tool moves on a circular path from the starting point X, Z to
contour end point X2, Z2 and stops at the end of the cycle.
Contour circular (with return)
The tool approaches the workpiece, executes the circular cut and
returns to the starting point at the end of cycle (see figures). Cutter
radius compensation is taken into account.
Cycle parameters
X, Z Starting point
X1, Z1 Starting point of contour (if "With return" is active)
R Radius of rounding
ID Tool ID number
machining step

1 Move paraxially from the starting point to the contour starting
point X1, Z1
2 Move in circular arc to contour end point X2, Z2 at the
programmed feed rate
122 Teach-in Mode

Chamfer
Select chamfer

Chamfer
The cycle produces a chamfer that is dimensioned relative to the
corner of the workpiece contour. When the cycle is completed, the
tool remains at the cycle end position.
Contour chamfer (with return)
The tool approaches the workpiece, machines the chamfer that is
dimensioned relative to the corner of the workpiece contour and
returns to the starting point at the end of cycle. Cutter radius
Cycle parameters
X, Z Starting point
X1, Z1 Corner point of contour
A Starting angle: Angle of the chamfer (range: 0°< A < 90°)
I, K Chamfer width (in X, Z)
J Element position (default: 1)—the algebraic sign
determines the cutting direction (see help graphic)
ID Tool ID number
machining step

Parameter combinations for defining the chamfer:
I or K (45° chamfer)
I, K
I, A or K, A

1 Calculate starting point and end point of chamfer
2 Move paraxially from the starting point to the "chamfer starting
point"
3 Move to end point of chamfer at the programmed feed rate
124 Teach-in Mode

Rounding arc
Select rounding

Rounding arc
The cycle produces a rounding arc that is dimensioned relative to the
corner of the workpiece contour. When the cycle is completed, the
tool remains at the cycle end position.
Contour rounding (with return)
The tool approaches the workpiece, machines the rounding that is
dimensioned relative to the corner of the workpiece contour and
returns to the starting point at the end of cycle. Cutter radius
Cycle parameters
X, Z Starting point
R Radius of rounding
J Element position (default: 1)—the algebraic sign
determines the cutting direction (see help graphic)
ID Tool ID number
machining step

1 Calculate the starting point and end point of rounding
2 Move paraxially from the starting point to the "arc starting point"
3 Move in circular arc to end point of rounding at programmed feed
rate

M functions
Machine commands (M functions) are not executed until cycle start
has been pressed. With the M list soft key you can open an overview
of the available M functions. For the meaning of the M functions, refer
to your machine manual.
M FUNCTION
Select M function
Enter the number of the M function

Conclude the entry
Activate cycle start
SPINDLE STOP M19 (SPINDLE POSITIONING)
Select M function
Switch M19 on
Enter the stopping angle

Conclude the entry
Activate cycle start
126 Teach-in Mode

4.4 Turning Cycles
4.4 Turning Cycles
Turning cycles rough and finish simple contours in basic

mode and complex contours in expanded mode.
With ICP cutting cycles, you can machine contours
defined with ICP. See “ICP Contours” on page 320.
Proportioning of cuts: The CNC PILOT calculates an

infeed that is <=infeed depth P. An "abrasive cut" is
avoided.
Oversizes: Oversizes are considered in "expanded"
mode.
Cutter radius compensation: Active
Safety clearance after each step:
Basic mode: 1 mm
Expanded mode: The safety clearance is set Turning cycles Symbol
separately for internal and external machining (see
“List of user parameters” on page 467). Turning, longitudinal/transverse
Roughing and finishing cycle for
simple contours
Cutting and infeed directions for turning cycles
The CNC PILOT automatically determines the cutting and infeed Plunge-cutting, longitudinal/
directions from the cycle parameters. transverse
Basic mode: The parameters for starting point X, Z (Manual mode: simple plunge-cut contours
current tool position) and contour starting point X1 / contour end
point Z2 determine these directions. ICP contour-parallel,
Expanded mode: The parameters for contour starting point X1, Z1 longitudinal/transverse
and contour end point X2, Z2 determine these directions. Roughing and finishing cycle for
any type of contour (cutting paths
ICP cycles: The parameters for contour starting point X, Z (Manual
parallel to finished part)
mode: current tool position) and starting point of the ICP contour
determine these directions. ICP turning, longitudinal/
transverse
any type of contour

4.4 Turning Cycles
Tool position
It is important that you observe the tool positions (starting point X, Z)
before executing any of the turning cycles in expanded mode. The
rules also apply for all cutting and infeed directions as well as for
roughing and finishing (see examples of linear cycles).
The starting point must not be located in the shaded area.
The area to be machined starts at the starting point X, Z, if the
tool is positioned before the contour area. The control will otherwise
only machine the contour area defined.
If the starting point X, Z for internal machining is located above
the turning center, only the contour area defined will be machined.
(A = contour starting point X1, Z1; E = contour end point X2, Z2)
Contour elements
Contour elements in turning cycles

Basic mode
Machining a rectangular area
Expanded mode
Oblique cut at contour start
Expanded mode
Oblique cut at contour end
Expanded mode
Oblique cuts at contour start and end with
angles > 45°
Expanded mode
One oblique cut (by entering the starting point
of contour, end point of contour and starting
angle)
Expanded mode
Rounding
128 Teach-in Mode

4.4 Turning Cycles
Contour elements in turning cycles
Expanded mode
Chamfer (or rounding arc) at contour end
Basic mode
Machining with descending contour
Basic mode
Expanded mode
Rounding in contour valley (in both corners)
Expanded mode
Chamfer (or rounding arc) at contour start
Expanded mode

4.4 Turning Cycles
Roughing, longitudinal
Select cut, longitudinal/transverse
Select cut longitudinal
The cycle roughs the rectangle described by the starting point and
contour starting point X1/contour end point Z2.
Cycle parameters
X, Z Starting point
X1 Contour starting point
P Infeed depth: Maximum infeed depth
H Contour smoothing
0: With every cut
1: With the last cut
2: No finishing cut
G47 Safety clearance (see page 111)
G14 Tool change point (see page 111)
ID Tool ID number
machining step
Type of machining for technology database access: Roughing

Cycle run
1 Calculate the proportioning of cuts (infeed)
2 Approach the workpiece from starting point for first pass
3 Move at the programmed feed rate to the contour end point Z2
4 The contour is machined depending on the contour smoothing H
5 Retract and approach for next pass
6 Repeat 3 to 5 until the contour starting point X1 is reached
7 Return to starting point on diagonal path
8 Move to the tool change point according to the G14 setting
130 Teach-in Mode

4.4 Turning Cycles
Roughing, transverse
Select cut transverse
The cycle roughs the rectangle described by the starting point and
contour starting point Z1/contour end point X2.
Cycle parameters
X, Z Starting point
Z1 Contour starting point
H Contour smoothing
0: With every cut
2: No finishing cut
ID Tool ID number
machining step

Cycle run
3 Move at the programmed feed rate to the contour end point X2
4 The contour is machined depending on the contour smoothing H:
6 Repeat 3 to 5 until the contour starting point Z1 is reached

4.4 Turning Cycles
Roughing, longitudinal—expanded
Press the Expanded soft key
Taking the oversizes into account, the cycle roughs the area described
by the starting point and contour starting point X1/contour end
point Z2.
Cycle parameters
X, Z Starting point
X1, Z1 Contour starting point
A Starting angle (range: 0° <= A < 90°)
W End angle (range: 0° <= W < 90°)
R Rounding arc
I, K Oversizes X, Z
H Contour smoothing
0: With every cut
2: No finishing cut
ID Tool ID number
B1, B2 Chamfer/rounding arc (B1 contour start; B2 contour end)
B>0: Rounding radius
B<0: Chamfer width
BP Break duration: Time span for interruption of the feed. The
chip is broken by the (intermittent) interruption of the feed.
BF Feed duration: Time interval until the next break. The chip
is broken by the (intermittent) interruption of the feed.
132 Teach-in Mode

4.4 Turning Cycles
machining step

By setting the following optional parameters, you can define
additional contour elements:
A:Oblique cut at contour start
W:Oblique cut at contour end
R:Rounding
B1:Chamfer/Rounding at contour start
B2:Chamfer/Rounding at contour end
BP:Pause duration
BF:Feed duration
WS:Angle of the chamfer at the contour starting point (not yet
implemented)
WE:Angle of the chamfer at the contour end point (not yet
implemented)
Cycle run
3 Move at the programmed feed rate to the contour end point Z2,
or if defined, to one of the optional contour elements
6 Repeat 3 to 5 until the contour starting point X1 is reached
7 Return to starting point on paraxial path

4.4 Turning Cycles
Roughing, transverse—expanded
Taking the oversizes into account, the cycle roughs the area described
by the starting point and the contour starting point Z1/contour
end point X2.
Cycle parameters
X, Z Starting point
R Rounding arc
I, K Oversizes X, Z
H Contour smoothing
0: With every cut
2: No finishing cut
ID Tool ID number
B<0: Chamfer width
134 Teach-in Mode

4.4 Turning Cycles
machining step

R:Rounding
BP:Pause duration
BF:Feed duration
implemented)
implemented)
Cycle run
3 Move at the programmed feed rate to the contour end point X2,
6 Repeat 3 to 5 until the contour starting point Z1 is reached

4.4 Turning Cycles
Finishing cut, longitudinal
Press the Finishing run soft key
The cycle finishes the contour area from contour starting point X1
to contour end point Z2.
At the end of the cycle, the tool returns to the starting

point.
Cycle parameters
X, Z Starting point
X1 Contour starting point
ID Tool ID number
machining step

Cycle run
1 Move in transverse direction from the starting point to the contour
starting point X1
2 Finish first in longitudinal direction, then in transverse direction
3 Return in longitudinal direction to starting point
136 Teach-in Mode

4.4 Turning Cycles
Finishing cut, transverse
The cycle finishes the contour area from contour starting point Z1
to contour end point X2.

point.
Cycle parameters
X, Z Starting point
Z1 Contour starting point
ID Tool ID number
machining step

Cycle run
1 Move in longitudinal direction from the starting point to the
contour starting point Z1
2 Finish first in transverse direction, then in longitudinal direction
3 Return in transverse direction to starting point

4.4 Turning Cycles
Finishing cut, longitudinal—expanded
The cycle finishes the contour area from the contour starting point
to the contour end point.
When the cycle is completed, the tool remains at the cycle

end position.
Cycle parameters
X, Z Starting point
R Rounding arc
DXX Additive compensation number 1 –16 (see page 111)
G58 Contour-parallel oversize
B<0: Chamfer width
ID Tool ID number
machining step
138 Teach-in Mode

4.4 Turning Cycles
R:Rounding
implemented)
implemented)
Cycle run
starting point X1, Z1
2 Finish contour area from contour starting point X1, Z1 to end
point X2, Z2, taking optional contour elements into account
3 According to the G14 setting it moves to the tool change position

4.4 Turning Cycles
Finishing cut, transverse—Expanded
to the contour end point.
When the cycle is completed, the tool remains at the cycle

end position.
Cycle parameters
X, Z Starting point
R Rounding arc
ID Tool ID number
B<0: Chamfer width
machining step
140 Teach-in Mode

4.4 Turning Cycles
R:Rounding
WS: Angle of the chamfer at the contour starting point (not yet
implemented)
WE: Angle of the chamfer at the contour end point (not yet
implemented)
Cycle run
1 Move in longitudinal direction from the starting point to the
contour starting point X1, Z1
2 Finish contour area from contour starting point X1, Z1 to end
point X2, Z2, taking optional contour elements into account

4.4 Turning Cycles
Cut, longitudinal plunge
Select plunge, longitudinal
The cycle roughs the area described by the contour starting point,
contour end point and plunge angle.
The tool plunges with the maximum possible angle,

leaving material remaining.
The steeper the tool plunges into the material, the
greater the feed rate decrease (max. 50 %).
Cycle parameters
X, Z Starting point
H Contour smoothing
0: With every cut
2: No finishing cut
A Plunge angle (range: 0° <= A < 90°; default: 0°)
W End angle—oblique cut at contour end
(Range: 0° <= W < 90°)
ID Tool ID number
machining step
142 Teach-in Mode

4.4 Turning Cycles
Cycle run
2 Approach workpiece from starting point for first pass
3 Plunge-cut at plunging angle A with reduced feed
or to the oblique surface defined by the end angle W
6 Return and approach again for next pass
7 Repeat 3 to 6 until contour end point X2 is reached

4.4 Turning Cycles
Cut, transverse plunge
Select plunge, transverse
contour end point and plunge angle.

Cycle parameters
X, Z Starting point
H Contour smoothing
0: With every cut
2: No finishing cut
(Range: 0° <= W < 90°)
ID Tool ID number
machining step
144 Teach-in Mode

4.4 Turning Cycles
Cycle run
2 Approach workpiece from starting point for first pass
or to the oblique surface defined by the end angle W
6 Return and approach again for next pass

4.4 Turning Cycles
Cut, longitudinal plunging—expanded
contour end point and plunge angle, taking the oversizes into
consideration.

Cycle parameters
X, Z Starting point
H Contour smoothing
0: With every cut
2: No finishing cut
I, K Oversizes X, Z
R Rounding arc
(Range: 0° <= W < 90°)
ID Tool ID number
146 Teach-in Mode

4.4 Turning Cycles
machining step

R:Rounding arc (in both corners of the contour valley)
BP:Pause duration
BF:Feed duration
Cycle run
2 Approaches workpiece from starting point for first pass
6 Return and approach for next pass

4.4 Turning Cycles
Cut, transverse plunging—expanded
contour end point and plunge angle, taking the oversizes into
consideration.

Cycle parameters
X, Z Starting point
H Contour smoothing
0: With every cut
2: No finishing cut
I, K Oversizes X, Z
R Rounding arc
(Range: 0° <= W < 90°)
ID Tool ID number
148 Teach-in Mode

4.4 Turning Cycles
machining step

BP:Pause duration
BF:Feed duration
Cycle run
7 Repeat 3 to 6 until contour end point Z2 is reached

4.4 Turning Cycles
Cut, longitudinal finishing plunge
to the contour end point. At the end of the cycle, the tool returns to
the starting point.

Cycle parameters
X, Z Starting point
(Range: 0° <= W < 90°)
ID Tool ID number
machining step

Cycle run
2 Finish defined contour area
150 Teach-in Mode

4.4 Turning Cycles
Cut, transverse finishing plunge
to the contour end point. At the end of the cycle, the tool returns to
the starting point.

Cycle parameters
X, Z Starting point
(Range: 0° <= W < 90°)
ID Tool ID number
machining step

Cycle run

4.4 Turning Cycles
Cut, longitudinal finishing plunge—expanded
to the contour end point. When the cycle is completed, the tool
remains at the cycle end position.

Cycle parameters
X, Z Starting point
(Range: 0° <= W < 90°)
R Rounding arc
ID Tool ID number
B<0: Chamfer width
152 Teach-in Mode

4.4 Turning Cycles
machining step

Cycle run
point X1, Z1
2 Finish the defined contour area, taking optional contour elements
into account

4.4 Turning Cycles
Cut, transverse finishing plunge—expanded
to the contour end point. When the cycle is completed, the tool
remains at the cycle end position.

Cycle parameters
X, Z Starting point
(Range: 0° <= W < 90°)
R Rounding arc
ID Tool ID number
B<0: Chamfer width
154 Teach-in Mode

4.4 Turning Cycles
machining step

Cycle run
point X1, Z1
2 Finish the defined contour area, taking optional contour elements
into account

4.4 Turning Cycles
Cut, ICP contour-parallel, longitudinal
Select ICP contour-parallel, longitudinal
The cycle roughs the defined area on contour-parallel paths.
The cycle roughs contour parallel depending on the

workpiece blank oversize J and the type of cutting
lines H:
J=0: the area defined by X, Z and the ICP contour,
taking the oversizes into account.
J>0: The area defined by the ICP contour (plus
oversizes) and the workpiece blank oversize J.
For workpiece blank oversize J>0: Set the infeed depth
P to the smaller infeed, if the maximum infeed differs for
the longitudinal and transverse directions due to the cutting
geometry.
Cycle parameters
X, Z Starting point
FK ICP finished part: Name of the contour to be machined
P Infeed depth—is determined taking J into account
J=0: P is the maximum infeed depth. The cycle reduces
the infeed depth if the programmed infeed is not
possible in the transverse or longitudinal direction due to
the cutting geometry.
J>0: P is the infeed depth. This infeed is used in the
longitudinal and transverse directions.
H Type of cutting lines—the cycle machines
0: with constant cutting depth
1: with equidistant cutting lines
I, K Oversizes X, Z
J Workpiece blank oversize—the cycle machines
J=0: From the current tool position
J>0: The area defined by the workpiece blank oversize
SX, SZ Cutting limits (see page 111)
156 Teach-in Mode

4.4 Turning Cycles
ID Tool ID number
A Approach angle (reference: Z-axis)—(default: parallel to Z
axis)
W Departure angle (reference: Z axis)—(default: orthogonal
to Z axis)
XA, ZA Starting point of blank (only effective if no blank was
programmed):
XA, ZA not programmed: The workpiece blank contour
is calculated from the tool position and the ICP contour
XA, ZA programmed: Definition of the corner point of
the workpiece blank
machining step

Cycle run
1 Calculate the proportioning of cuts (infeed), taking the workpiece
blank oversize J and the type of cutting lines H into account
J=0: The cutting geometry is taken into account. This may result
in the use of different infeeds for the longitudinal and transverse
directions.
J>0: The same infeed is used for both the longitudinal and the
transverse direction.
3 Machine the workpiece according to the calculated proportioning
of cuts
5 Repeat 3 to 4 until the defined area has been machined

4.4 Turning Cycles
Cut, ICP contour-parallel, transverse
Select ICP contour-parallel, transverse
The cycle roughs the defined area on contour-parallel paths.
The cycle roughs contour parallel depending on the

workpiece blank oversize J and the type of cutting
lines H:
J=0: the area defined by X, Z and the ICP contour,
J>0: The area defined by the ICP contour (plus
oversizes) and the workpiece blank oversize J.
For workpiece blank oversize J>0: Set the infeed depth
P to the smaller infeed, if the maximum infeed differs for
the longitudinal and transverse directions due to the cutting
geometry.
Cycle parameters
X, Z Starting point
P Infeed depth—is determined taking J into account
J=0: P is the maximum infeed depth. The cycle reduces
the infeed depth if the programmed infeed is not
possible in the transverse or longitudinal direction due to
the cutting geometry.
J>0: P is the infeed depth. This infeed is used in the
longitudinal and transverse directions.
H Type of cutting lines—the cycle machines
0: with constant cutting depth
1: with equidistant cutting lines
I, K Oversizes X, Z
J Workpiece blank oversize—the cycle machines
J=0: From the current tool position
J>0: The area defined by the workpiece blank oversize
158 Teach-in Mode

4.4 Turning Cycles
ID Tool ID number
programmed):
the workpiece blank
A Approach angle (reference: Z axis)—(default: orthogonal to
Z axis)
W Departure angle (reference: Z axis)—(default: parallel to Z
axis)
machining step

Cycle run
1 Calculate the proportioning of cuts (infeed), taking the workpiece
blank oversize J into account
J=0: The cutting geometry is taken into account. This may result
in the use of different infeeds for the longitudinal and transverse
directions.
J>0: The same infeed is used for both the longitudinal and the
transverse direction.
of cuts

4.4 Turning Cycles
Cut, ICP contour-parallel, longitudinal finishing
Select ICP contour-parallel, longitudinal
The cycle finishes the contour area defined by the ICP contour. When
the cycle is completed, the tool remains at the cycle end position.

Cycle parameters
X, Z Starting point
ID Tool ID number
machining step

Cycle run
1 Move paraxially from the starting point to the ICP contour starting
point
160 Teach-in Mode

4.4 Turning Cycles
Cut, ICP contour-parallel, transverse finishing
Select ICP contour-parallel, transverse

Cycle parameters
X, Z Starting point
ID Tool ID number
machining step

Cycle run
point

4.4 Turning Cycles
ICP cutting, longitudinal
Select ICP cutting, longitudinal
The cycle machines the area defined by the starting point and the ICP
contour, taking the oversizes into account.

Cycle parameters
X, Z Starting point
H Contour smoothing
0: With every cut
2: No finishing cut
I, K Oversizes X, Z
E Plunging behavior:
No input: Automatic feed-rate reduction
E=0: No plunging
E>0: Plunging feed rate in use
ID Tool ID number
A Approach angle (reference: Z-axis)—(default: parallel to Z
axis)
W Departure angle (reference: Z axis)—(default: orthogonal
to Z axis)
162 Teach-in Mode

4.4 Turning Cycles
programmed):
the workpiece blank
machining step

Cycle run
3 For sloping contours, plunge into the material at reduced feed rate
of cuts

4.4 Turning Cycles
ICP cutting, transverse
Select ICP cutting, transverse
The cycle machines the area defined by the starting point and the ICP

Cycle parameters
X, Z Starting point
H Contour smoothing
0: With every cut
2: No finishing cut
I, K Oversizes X, Z
E Plunging behavior:
No input: Automatic feed-rate reduction
E=0: No plunging
E>0: Plunging feed rate in use
ID Tool ID number
programmed):
the workpiece blank
164 Teach-in Mode

4.4 Turning Cycles
A Approach angle (reference: Z axis)—(default: orthogonal to
Z axis)
W Departure angle (reference: Z axis)—(default: parallel to Z
axis)
machining step

Cycle run
3 For sloping contours, plunge into the material at reduced feed rate
of cuts

4.4 Turning Cycles
ICP longitudinal finishing cut
Select ICP cutting, longitudinal

Cycle parameters
X, Z Starting point
ID Tool ID number
machining step

Cycle run
point
166 Teach-in Mode

4.4 Turning Cycles
ICP transverse finishing cut
Select ICP cutting, transverse

Cycle parameters
X, Z Starting point
ID Tool ID number
machining step

Cycle run
point

4.4 Turning Cycles
Examples of turning cycles
Roughing and finishing an outside contour
The shaded area from AP (starting point of contour) to EP (contour end

point) is rough-machined with the cycle Plunge longitudinal—
expanded, taking oversizes into account. This contour area is to be
finished subsequently with the cycle Finishing cut longitudinal—
expanded.
The rounding arc and the oblique cut at the contour end are also
machined in "expanded mode."
The parameters for contour starting point X1, Z1 and contour end
point X2, Z2 determine the cutting and infeed directions—in this
example, external machining and infeed in negative X-axis direction.
Tool data
Turning tool (for external machining)
WO = 1 (tool orientation)
A = 93° (tool angle)
B = 55° (point angle)
168 Teach-in Mode

4.4 Turning Cycles
Roughing and finishing an inside contour

expanded, taking oversizes into account. This contour area is to be
finished subsequently with the cycle Finishing cut longitudinal—
expanded.
The rounding arc and the chamfer at the contour end are also
machined in "expanded mode."
example, internal machining and infeed in negative X-axis direction.
Tool data
Turning tool (for internal machining)

4.4 Turning Cycles
Roughing (recess clearance) with plunge cycle
The tool to be used cannot plunge at the required angle of 15°. The
roughing process for the area therefore requires two steps.
First step:
expanded, taking oversizes into account.
The starting angle A is defined with 15°, as specified in the
workpiece drawing. From the tool parameters, the CNC PILOT
automatically calculates the maximum plunging angle that can be
achieved with the programmed tool. The resulting contour will not be
complete and will be reworked in the second step.
The rounding arcs in the contour valley are also machined in "expanded
mode."
Be sure to enter the correct values for the parameters contour
starting point X1, Z1 and contour end point X2, Z2. These
parameters determine the cutting and infeed directions—in this
Tool data
170 Teach-in Mode

4.4 Turning Cycles
Second step:
The area that was left out in the first step (shaded area in the figure) is
machined with the cycle Plunge, longitudinal—expanded. Before
executing this step, you must change tools.
The rounding arcs in the contour valley are also machined in "expanded
mode."
The parameter for the contour starting point Z1 was determined
during simulation of the first step.
Tool data

4.5 Recessing Cycles
The recessing cycle group comprises recessing, recess

turning, undercut and parting cycles. Simple contours are
machined in basic mode, complex contours in expanded
mode. ICP recessing cycles machine contours defined
with ICP (see “ICP Contours” on page 320).
Proportioning of cuts: The CNC PILOT calculates a

constant recessing width that is <=infeed depth P.
Oversizes are considered in “expanded” mode
Cutter radius compensation is conducted (exception:
Undercut type K).
Cutting and infeed directions for recessing

cycles
The CNC PILOT automatically determines the cutting and infeed
directions from the cycle parameters. The decisive ones are: Recessing cycles Symbol
Basic mode: The parameters for starting point X, Z (Manual mode: Recessing radial/axial
current tool position) and contour starting point X1 / contour end Recessing and finishing cycles for
point Z2 simple contours
Expanded mode: The parameters for contour starting point X1, Z1 ICP recessing, radial/axial
and contour end point X2, Z2 Recessing and finishing cycles for
ICP cycles: The parameters for starting point X, Z (Manual mode: any contour
current tool position) and starting point of the ICP contour
Recess turning, radial/axial
Recess-turning and finishing cycles
for simple contours and any type of
contour
Undercut H
Undercut type H
Undercut K
Undercut type K
Undercut U
Undercut type U
Parting
Cycle for parting the workpiece
172 Teach-in Mode

Undercut position
The CNC PILOT determines the position of an undercut from the cycle
parameters for starting point X, Z (current tool position in Manual
mode) and corner point of contour X1, Z1.
Undercuts can only be executed in orthogonal, paraxial

contour corners along the longitudinal axis.
Contour forms
Contour elements in recessing cycles

Basic mode
Machining a rectangular area
Expanded mode
Oblique cut at contour start
Expanded mode
Expanded mode
Rounding arc in both corners of the contour
valley
Expanded mode
Chamfer (or rounding arc) at contour start
Expanded mode

Recessing, radial
Call the recessing cycles
Select recessing, radial
The cycle machines the number of recesses defined in number Qn. The
parameters for starting point and end point of contour define the
first recess (position, recess depth and recess width).
Cycle parameters
X, Z Starting point
P Recessing width: infeeds <= P (no input: P = 0.8 * cutting
width of the tool)
EZ Dwell time for chip breaking (default: length of time for
two revolutions)
Qn Number of recess cycles (default: 1)
DX, DZ Distance to subsequent recess with respect to the
preceding recess
ID Tool ID number
machining step
Type of machining for technology database access: contour

recessing
Cycle run
1 Calculate the recess positions and the proportioning of cuts
2 Approach the workpiece for next recess from starting point or from
last recess on paraxial path
4 Remain at this position for dwell time EZ
6 Repeat 3 to 5 until the complete recess has been machined
7 Repeat 2 to 6 until all recesses have been machined
174 Teach-in Mode

Recessing, axial
Select axial recessing
Cycle parameters
X, Z Starting point
width of the tool)
two revolutions)
preceding recess
ID Tool ID number
machining step

recessing

Cycle run
4 Remain at this position for dwell time EZ
176 Teach-in Mode

Recessing, radial—expanded
parameters for the contour starting point and end point of
contour define the first recess (position, recess depth and recess
width).
Cycle parameters
X, Z Starting point
B<0: Chamfer width
R Rounding arc
I, K Oversizes X, Z
ID Tool ID number
width of the tool)
ET Recessing depth by which one cut is fed
two revolutions)
preceding recess

machining step

recessing
Cycle run
4 Remain at this position for a dwell time of two revolutions
178 Teach-in Mode

Recessing, axial—expanded
width).
Cycle parameters
X, Z Starting point
B<0: Chamfer width
R Rounding arc
I, K Oversizes X, Z
ID Tool ID number
width of the tool)
two revolutions)
preceding recess

machining step

recessing
Cycle run
4 Remain at this position for a dwell time of two revolutions
180 Teach-in Mode

Recessing radial, finishing
The cycle finishes the number of recesses defined in number Qn. The
Cycle parameters
X, Z Starting point
preceding recess
ID Tool ID number
machining step

recessing
Cycle run
1 Calculate the recess positions
3 Finish first side and the contour valley up to position just before
recess end point
4 Approach workpiece for finishing the second side on paraxial path
5 Finish the second side and the remainder of the contour valley

Recessing axial, finishing
The cycle finishes the number of recesses defined in number Qn. The
Cycle parameters
X, Z Starting point
preceding recess
ID Tool ID number
machining step

recessing
Cycle run
3 Finish first side and the contour valley up to position just before
recess end point
5 Finish the second side and the remainder of the contour valley
182 Teach-in Mode

Recessing radial, finishing—expanded
width).
Cycle parameters
X, Z Starting point
B<0: Chamfer width
R Rounding arc
ID Tool ID number
preceding recess
machining step

recessing

Cycle run
3 Finish first side (taking the optional contour elements into account)
and the contour valley up to position just before recess end point
5 Finish second side, taking optional contour elements into account;
then finish remainder of contour valley
6 Repeat 2 to 5 until all recesses have been finished
184 Teach-in Mode

Recessing axial, finishing—expanded
width).
Cycle parameters
X, Z Starting point
B<0: Chamfer width
R Rounding arc
ID Tool ID number
preceding recess
machining step

recessing

Cycle run
3 Finish first side (taking the optional contour elements into account)
and the contour valley up to position just before recess end point
then finish remainder of contour valley.
6 Repeat 2 to 5 until all recesses have been finished
186 Teach-in Mode

ICP recessing cycles, radial
Select recessing, radial ICP.
The cycle machines the number of recesses defined in number Qn with

the ICP recessing contour. The starting point defines the position of
the first recess.
Cycle parameters
X, Z Starting point
width of the tool)
I, K Oversizes X, Z
two revolutions)
preceding recess
ID Tool ID number
machining step

recessing

Cycle run
3 Machine along the defined contour
188 Teach-in Mode

ICP recessing cycles, axial
Select recessing, axial ICP
The cycle machines the number of recesses defined in number Qn with

the first recess.
Cycle parameters
X, Z Starting point
width of the tool)
I, K Oversizes X, Z
two revolutions)
preceding recess
ID Tool ID number
machining step

recessing

Cycle run
3 Machine along the defined contour
190 Teach-in Mode

ICP recessing, radial finishing
Select recessing, radial ICP.
The cycle finishes the number of recesses defined in number Qn with

the first recess.

point.
Cycle parameters
X, Z Starting point
preceding recess
ID Tool ID number
machining step

recessing

Cycle run
3 Finish the recess
192 Teach-in Mode

ICP recessing, axial finishing
The cycle finishes the number of recesses defined in number Qn with

the first recess.

point.
Cycle parameters
X, Z Starting point
preceding recess
ID Tool ID number
machining step

recessing

Cycle run
3 Finish the recess
Recess turning
The recess turning cycles machine by alternate recessing and
roughing movements. The machining process requires a minimum of
retraction and infeed movements.
To influence recess-turning operations, use the following parameters:
Recessing feed rate O: Feed rate for recessing movement
Turning operation, unidirectional/bidirectional U: You can
perform a unidirectional or bidirectional turning operation. With
radial recess-turning cycles, unidirectional turning operations are
always performed in the direction of the spindle. With axial ICP
recess-turning cycles, the machining direction corresponds to the
direction of contour definition.
Offset width B: After the second infeed movement, during the
transition from turning to recessing, the path to be machined is
reduced by the offset width. Each time the system switches from
turning to recessing on this side, the path is reduced by the offset
width—in addition to the previous offset. The total offset is limited
to 80 % of the effective cutting width (effective cutting width =
cutting width –2*cutting radius). If required, the CNC PILOT reduces
the programmed offset width. After precutting, the remaining
material is removed with a single cut.
Depth compensation RB: Depending on factors such as workpiece
material or feed rate, the tool tip is displaced during a turning
operation. The resulting infeed error can be compensated with
depth compensation during "finishing, expanded." The depth
compensation factor is usually determined empirically.
These cycles require the use of recess-turning tools.
194 Teach-in Mode

Recess turning, radial
Select recess turning
Select recess turning, radial
The cycle clears the rectangle described by the starting point and
contour end point.
Cycle parameters
X, Z Starting point
O Recessing feed rate (default: active feed rate)
B Offset width (default: 0)
U Unidirectional turning (default: 0)
0: Bidirectional
1: Unidirectional
ID Tool ID number
machining step
Type of machining for technology database access: Recess turning

Cycle run
1 Calculate the proportioning of cuts
3 Executes the first cut (recessing)
4 Machines perpendicularly to recessing direction (turning)
5 Repeats 3 to 4 until contour end point X2, Z2 is reached

Recess turning, axial
Select recess turning, axial
The cycle clears the rectangle described by the starting point and
contour end point.
Cycle parameters
X, Z Starting point
0: Bidirectional
1: Unidirectional
ID Tool ID number
machining step

Cycle run
3 Execute the first cut (recessing)
4 Machine perpendicularly to recessing direction (turning)
5 Repeat 3 to 4 until contour end point X2, Z2 is reached
196 Teach-in Mode

Recess turning, radial—expanded
Select recess turning, radial.
Taking the oversizes into account, the cycle clears the area described
by the starting point X/ contour starting point Z1 and contour
end point (see also “Recess turning” on page 194).
Cycle parameters
X, Z Starting point
I, K Oversizes X, Z
R Rounding arc
ID Tool ID number
B<0: Chamfer width
0: Bidirectional
1: Unidirectional
machining step

Cycle run
6 Machine chamfer/rounding at contour start / contour end if
defined.
198 Teach-in Mode

Recessing turning, axial—expanded
Taking the oversizes into account, the cycle clears the area described
by the contour starting point X1/Starting point Z and contour end
point (see also “Recess turning” on page 194).
Cycle parameters
X, Z Starting point
I, K Oversizes X, Z
W End angle [range (0° <= W < 90°)]
R Rounding arc
ID Tool ID number
B<0: Chamfer width
0: Bidirectional
1: Unidirectional
machining step

Cycle run
6 Machine chamfer/rounding at contour start / contour end if defined
8 Move to the tool change position according to the G14 setting
200 Teach-in Mode

Recess turning, radial finishing
The cycle finishes the contour section described by the starting

point and contour end point. (see also “Recess turning” on
page 194).
With oversizes I, K for the workpiece blank, you define

the material to be machined during the finishing cycle. For
this purpose, enter the oversizes for recess turning,
finishing.
Cycle parameters
X, Z Starting point
I, K Workpiece blank oversize X, Z
ID Tool ID number
machining step

Cycle run
1 Approach workpiece from starting point
2 Finish the first side, then finish the contour valley up to position
just before contour end point X2, Z2
3 Move paraxially to the starting point X/end point Z2
4 Finish second side, then finish remainder of contour valley
202 Teach-in Mode

Recess turning, axial finishing
The cycle finishes the contour section described by the starting

point and contour end point. (see also “Recess turning” on
page 194).

finishing.
Cycle parameters
X, Z Starting point
I, K Workpiece blank oversize X, Z
ID Tool ID number
machining step

Cycle run
2 Finish the first side, then finish the contour valley up to position
just before contour end point X2, Z2
3 Move paraxially to the starting point Z/end point X2
204 Teach-in Mode

Recess turning, radial finishing—expanded
The cycle finishes the contour section defined by the contour

starting point and contour end point. (see also “Recess turning”
on page 194).

finishing.
Cycle parameters
X, Z Starting point
RB Depth compensation
I, K Oversizes X, Z
R Rounding arc
ID Tool ID number
B<0: Chamfer width

machining step

Cycle run
2 Finish first side, taking optional contour elements into account;
then finish contour valley up to position just before end point X2/
Z2
5 Finish chamfer/rounding at contour start / contour end, if defined
206 Teach-in Mode

Recess turning, axial finishing—expanded
The cycle finishes the contour section defined by the contour

starting point and contour end point. (see also “Recess turning”
on page 194).

finishing.
Cycle parameters
X, Z Starting point
I, K Oversizes X, Z
R Rounding arc
ID Tool ID number
B<0: Chamfer width

machining step

Cycle run
2 Finish first side, taking optional contour elements into account;
then finish contour valley up to position just before end point X2/
Z2
5 Finish chamfer/rounding at contour start / contour end, if defined
208 Teach-in Mode

ICP recess turning, radial
The cycle clears the defined area (see also “Recess turning” on
page 194).
If you are machining

descending contours, define the starting point—not
the starting point of the blank. The cycle clears the
area defined by the starting point and the ICP contour,
inclining contours, define the starting point and the
starting point of the blank. The cycle clears the area
defined by the contour starting point and the ICP
Cycle parameters
X, Z Starting point
X1, Z1 Starting point of blank
ET Recessing depth by which one cut is fed.
I, K Oversizes X, Z
0: Bidirectional
1: Unidirectional (direction: see help graphic)
ID Tool ID number

machining step

Cycle run
210 Teach-in Mode

ICP recess turning, axial
The cycle clears the defined area (see also “Recess turning” on
page 194).
If you are machining

descending contours, define only the starting
point—not the contour starting point. The cycle
clears the area defined by the starting point and the ICP
inclining contours, define the starting point and the
contour starting point. The cycle clears the area
defined by the contour starting point and the ICP
Cycle parameters
X, Z Starting point
X1, Z1 Starting point of blank
ET Recessing depth by which one cut is fed.
I, K Oversizes X, Z
0: Bidirectional
1: Unidirectional (direction: see help graphic)
ID Tool ID number

machining step

Cycle run
212 Teach-in Mode

ICP recess turning, radial finishing
Select recess turning, radial ICP
The cycle finishes the contour area defined by the ICP contour section
(see also “Recess turning” on page 194). At the end of the cycle, the
tool returns to the starting point.

finishing.
Cycle parameters
X, Z Starting point
I, K Oversizes X, Z
ID Tool ID number
machining step

Cycle run
1 Approach workpiece from starting point on paraxial path
2 Finish first side and contour area up to position just before end
point X2, Z2
214 Teach-in Mode

ICP recess turning, axial finishing
Select recess turning, axial ICP
The cycle finishes the contour area defined by the ICP contour section
(see also “Recess turning” on page 194). At the end of the cycle, the
tool returns to the starting point.

finishing.
Cycle parameters
X, Z Starting point
I, K Oversizes X, Z
ID Tool ID number
machining step

Cycle run
1 Approach workpiece from starting point on paraxial path
2 Finish first side and contour area up to position just before end
point X2, Z2
216 Teach-in Mode

Undercutting type H
Select undercutting H
The contour depends on the parameters defined. If you do not define

an undercut radius R, the oblique cut will be executed up to contour
corner Z1 (tool radius = undercut radius).
If you do not define the plunging angle, it is calculated from the
undercut length and undercut radius. The final point of the undercut
is then located at the contour corner.
The end point of the undercut is determined from the plunging angle
in accordance with Undercut type H.
Cycle parameters
X, Z Starting point
K Undercut length
R Undercut radius (default: no circular element)
W Plunging angle (default: W is calculated)
ID Tool ID number
machining step

Cycle run
1 Approach the workpiece from the starting point to the safety
clearance
2 Machine undercut according to cycle parameters.

Undercutting type K
Select undercut K
This cycle performs only one cut at an angle of 45°. The resulting
contour geometry therefore depends on the tool that is used.
Cycle parameters
X, Z Starting point
I Undercut depth
ID Tool ID number
machining step

Cycle run
1 Pre-position at an angle of 45° to safety clearance above the
contour corner point X1, Z1 at rapid traverse
2 Plunge by undercut depth I
3 Return the tool to the starting point on same path
218 Teach-in Mode

Undercutting type U
Select undercutting U
This cycle machines an Undercut type U and, if programmed,

finishes the adjoining plane surface. The undercut is executed in
several passes if the undercut width is greater than the cutting width
of the tool. If the cutting width of the tool is not defined, the control
assumes that the tool’s cutting width equals the undercut width.
Either a chamfer or a rounding arc can be machined.
Cycle parameters
X, Z Starting point
X2 End point on plane surface
I Undercut diameter
K Width of undercut
B Chamfer/Rounding
B<0: Chamfer width
ID Tool ID number
machining step

Cycle run
clearance
3 Move at feed rate to undercut diameter I and dwell at this
position (2 revolutions)
5 Repeat 3 to 4 until the corner point Z1 is reached
6 After the last pass, finish the adjoining plane surface, starting from
end point X2, if defined
7 Machine chamfer/rounding, if defined.
220 Teach-in Mode

Parting
Select parting
The cycle parts the workpiece. If programmed, a chamfer or rounding

arc is machined on the outside diameter.
Cycle parameters
X, Z Starting point
I Diameter for feed-rate reduction
B Chamfer/Rounding
B<0: Chamfer width
E Reduced feed rate
D Maximum speed
ID Tool ID number
machining step
Type of machining for technology database access: Parting

Cycle run
clearance
2 Cut to depth of chamfer or rounding and machine the chamfer/
rounding if defined
3 Depending on the cycle parameters, move at feed rate to
The turning center, or
The inside diameter (tube) XE
If you have programmed a feed rate reduction, the CNC PILOT
switches to the reduced feed E as soon as the tool reaches the
diameter feed reduction I.
4 Retract at end face and return to starting point.
The limit to the maximum speed “D” is only effective in the

cycle. After the cycle ends, the speed limit before the
cycle become effective.
222 Teach-in Mode

Examples of recessing cycles
Recess outside
The machining operation is to be executed first with the Recessing,

radial—expanded cycle, taking oversizes into account. This contour
area is to be finished subsequently with Recessing, radial
finishing, expanded.
The rounding arcs in the corners of the contour valley and the oblique
surfaces at the contour start and end are also machined in "expanded
mode."
example, external machining and infeed in negative Z-axis direction.
Tool data
SB = 4 (cutting width 4 mm)

Recess inside
The machining operation is to be executed first with the Recessing,

radial—expanded cycle, taking oversizes into account. This contour
area is to be finished subsequently with Recessing, radial
finishing, expanded.
Since the plunge width P is not entered, the CNC PILOT plunge-cuts
with 80% of the plunge-width of the tool.
In expanded mode, the chamfers are machined at the start/end of the
contour.
example, internal machining and infeed in negative Z-axis direction.
Tool data
SB = 2 (cutting width 2 mm)
224 Teach-in Mode

4.6 Thread and Undercut Cycles
The thread and undercut cycles machine single or multi-

start longitudinal and tapered threads, as well as thread
undercuts.
In Cycle mode you can
Repeat the last cut to compensate for tool inaccuracies.
Use the Recut function to rework damaged threads
(only in Manual mode).
Threads are cut with constant rotational speed.

At a cycle stop, the tool retracts with the spindle still
rotating. The cycle then has to be restarted.
Feed rate override is not effective during cycle
execution.
Thread position, undercut position

Thread position
The CNC PILOT determines the direction of the thread from the Thread and undercut cycles Symbol
parameters for starting point Z (or current tool position in Manual Thread cycle
mode) and end point Z2. You select internal or external thread by soft Longitudinal single or multi-start
key. thread
Undercut position
The CNC PILOT determines the position of an undercut from the Tapered thread
parameters for starting point X, Z (current tool position in Manual Tapered single or multi-start thread
mode) and cylinder starting point X1/end point Z2 on plane
surface. API thread
Single or multi-start API thread (API:
An undercut can only be machined in a right-angled American Petroleum Institute)
paraxial contour corner in the linear axis.
Undercut DIN 76
Thread undercut and thread chamfer
Undercut DIN 509 E

Undercut and cylinder chamfer
Undercut DIN 509 F


Handwheel superimposition
If your machine features handwheel superimposition, you can overlap
axis movements during thread cutting in a limited area:
X direction: Maximum programmed thread depth depending on the
current cutting depth
Z direction: +/- a fourth of the thread pitch
Machine and control must be specially prepared by the

machine tool builder for use of this cycle. Refer to your
machine tool manual.
Remember that position changes resulting from

handwheel superimposition are no longer effective after
the cycle end or the "last cut" function.
Feed angle, thread depth, proportioning of cuts

With some thread cycles, you can indicate the angle of infeed (thread
angle). The figures show the operating sequence at an angle of infeed
of –30° and an angle of infeed of 0°.
The thread depth is programmed for all thread cycles. The CNC PILOT
reduces the cutting depth with each cut (see figures).
226 Teach-in Mode

Thread run-in / thread run-out
The slide requires a run-in distance to accelerate to the programmed
feed rate before starting the actual thread, and a run-out distance at
the end of the thread to decelerate again.
If the run-in / run-out length is too short, the thread may not attain the
expected quality. In this case, the CNC PILOT displays a warning.

Last cut
After the cycle is finished, the CNC PILOT presents the Last cut
option. In this way you can enter a tool compensation value and repeat
the last thread cut.
SEQUENCE OF THE “LAST CUT” FUNCTION
Initial situation: The thread cut cycle has been run, and the thread
depth is not correct.
Perform the tool compensation
Press the Last cut soft key
Activate Cycle Start
Check the thread
The tool compensation and the last cut can be repeated

as often as necessary until the thread is correct.
228 Teach-in Mode

Thread cycle (longitudinal)
Call the thread-cutting menu
Select thread cycle
On: Internal thread

Off: External thread
This cycle cuts a single external or internal thread with a thread angle
of 30°. Tool infeed is performed in the X axis only.
Cycle parameters
X, Z Starting point of thread
Z2 End point of thread
F1 Thread pitch (= feed rate)
U Thread depth – No input:
External thread: U=0.6134*F1
Internal thread: U=–0.5413*F1
I Maximum infeed
I<U: First cut with cutting depth I; every further cut:
reduction of cutting depth
I=U: One cut
No input: I is calculated from U and F1
ID Tool ID number
GV Type of infeed
0: Constant mach. X-section
1: Constant infeed
2: W/ remaining cutting (with distribution of remaining
cuts)
3: W/o remaining cutting (without distribution of
remaining cuts)
4: Same as MANUALplus 4110
GH Type of offset
0: Without offset
1: From left
2: From right
3: Alternately left/right

A Approach (infeed) angle (range: –60° < A < 60°;
default 30°)
A<0: Infeed on left thread flank
A>0: Infeed on right thread flank
R Remaining cutting depth only with GV=4 (default 1/100
mm)
IC Number of cuts—the infeed is calculated from IC and U.
Usable with:
GV=0: Constant chip cross section
GV=1: Constant infeed
machining step
Type of machining for technology database access: thread cutting

Cycle run
2 Start first pass at starting point Z
4 Return on paraxial path and approach for next pass
5 Repeat 3 to 4 until the thread depth U is reached
230 Teach-in Mode

Thread cycle (longitudinal)—expanded
Select thread cycle
On: Internal thread

This cycle cuts a single or multi-start external or internal thread. The

thread starts at the starting point and ends at the end point of
thread (without a thread run-in or run-out).
Cycle parameters
X, Z Starting point of thread
D Number of thread starts (default: 1 single-start thread)
I Maximum infeed
I=U: One cut
GK Run-out length
ID Tool ID number
GV Type of infeed
1: Constant infeed
cuts)
remaining cuts)

GH Type of offset
0: Without offset
1: From left
2: From right
default 30°)
R Remaining cutting depth only with GV=4
(default 1/100 mm)
Q No. no load (number of dry runs)
Usable with:
machining step

Cycle run
2 Start the first thread groove at starting point Z
4 Return on paraxial path and approach for next thread groove
5 Repeat 3 and 4 for all thread grooves
6 Approach for next pass, taking the reduced cutting depth and the
feed angle A into account
7 Repeat 3 to 6 until no. threads D and depth U are reached
232 Teach-in Mode

Tapered thread
Select tapered thread
On: Internal thread

This cycle cuts a single or multi-start tapered external or internal

thread.
Cycle parameters
X, Z Starting point
X1, Z1 Starting point of thread
X2, Z2 End point of thread
I Maximum infeed
I=U: One cut
W Taper angle (range: –60° < A < 60°)
GK Run-out length
ID Tool ID number
GV Type of infeed
1: Constant infeed
cuts)
remaining cuts)

GH Type of offset
0: Without offset
1: From left
2: From right
default 30°)
(default 1/100 mm)
Usable with:
machining step

Parameter combinations for the taper angle:
X1/Z1, X2/Z2
X1/Z1, Z2, W
Z1, X2/Z2, W
Cycle run
2 Move to thread starting point X1, Z1.
7 Repeat 3 to 6 until no. threads D and depth U are reached
234 Teach-in Mode

API thread
Select API thread
On: Internal thread

This cycle cuts a single or multi-start API external or internal thread.

The depth of thread decreases at the overrun at the end of thread.
Cycle parameters
X, Z Starting point
I 1. Cutting depth
I<U: First cut with cutting depth I—further cuts:
Reduction of cutting depth down to J.
I=U: One cut
No input: Calculation from U and F1
WE Run-out angle (range: 0° < WE < 90°)
ID Tool ID number
GV Type of infeed
1: Constant infeed
cuts)
remaining cuts)

GH Type of offset
0: Without offset
1: From left
2: From right
default 30°)
(default 1/100 mm)
machining step

Parameter combinations for the taper angle:
X1/Z1, X2/Z2
X1/Z1, Z2, W
Z1, X2/Z2, W
Cycle run
2 Move to thread starting point X1, Z1.
3 Move to end point Z2 at programmed feed rate, taking the run-
out angle WE into account
7 Repeat 3 to 6 until no. threads D and depth U are reached.
236 Teach-in Mode

Recut (longitudinal) thread
Select thread cycle
Press the Recut soft key
On: Internal thread

This optional cycle reworks a single-start thread. Since you have

already unclamped the workpiece, the CNC PILOT needs to know the
exact position of the thread. Place the cutting tip of the tap drill in the
center of a groove and transfer the positions to the parameters
measured angles and measured position by pressing the Take over
position soft key. From these values the cycle then calculates the
angle of the spindle at the starting point.
This function is available only in manual operation.
Cycle parameters
X1 Starting point of thread
I Maximum infeed
Reduction of cutting depth
I=U: One cut
C Measured angle
ZC Measured position
default 30°)
(default 1/100 mm)

machining step
Cycle run
1 Pre-position threading tool to center of thread groove
2 Use the Take over position soft key to transfer the tool position
and spindle angle to the parameters measured positions ZC and
measured angle C
3 Move the tool manually out of the thread groove
4 Position the tool to the starting point
5 Start cycle with the Input finished soft key, then press Cycle
START
238 Teach-in Mode

Recut (longitudinal) thread—Expanded
Select thread cycle
On: Internal thread

This optional cycle recuts a single or multi-start external or internal

thread. Since you have already unclamped the workpiece, the CNC
PILOT needs to know the exact position of the thread. Place the
cutting tip of the tap drill in the center of a groove and transfer the
positions to the parameters measured angles and measured position
by pressing the Take over position soft key. From these values the
cycle then calculates the angle of the spindle at the starting point.
Cycle parameters
X1 Starting point of thread
D No. of gears (threads per unit)
I Maximum infeed
I=U: One cut
GK Run-out length
C Measured angle
default 30°)

(default 1/100 mm)
machining step
Cycle run
measured angle C
4 Position the tool to the starting point
START
240 Teach-in Mode

Recut tapered thread
Select tapered thread
On: Internal thread

This optional cycle recuts a single or multi-start external or internal

taper thread. Since you have already unclamped the workpiece, the
CNC PILOT needs to know the exact position of the thread. Place the
Cycle parameters
I Maximum infeed
I=U: One cut
GK Run-out length
C Measured angle
default 30°)

(default 1/100 mm)
machining step
Cycle run
measured angle C
4 Position the tool in front of the workpiece
START
242 Teach-in Mode

Recut API thread
Select API thread
On: Internal thread

This optional cycle recuts a single or multi-start external or internal API

thread. Since you have already unclamped the workpiece, the CNC
PILOT needs to know the exact position of the thread. Place the
Cycle parameters
I Maximum infeed
I=U: One cut
WE Run-out angle (range: 0° < WE < 90°)
C Measured angle
default 30°)

(default 1/100 mm)
machining step
Cycle run
measured angle C
4 Position the tool in front of the workpiece
START
244 Teach-in Mode

Undercut DIN 76
Select Undercut DIN 76

The cycle machines a thread undercut according to DIN 76, a thread

chamfer, then the cylinder, and finishes with the plane surface. The
thread chamfer is executed when you enter at least one of the
parameters cylinder 1st cut length or 1st cut radius.
Cycle parameters
X, Z Starting point
X1, Z1 Starting point of cylinder
X2, Z2 End point on plane surface
FP Thread pitch (default: value from standard table)
E Reduced feed rate for the plunge cut and the thread
chamfer (default: feed rate F)
I Undercut depth (default: value from standard table)
K Undercut length (default: value from standard table)
W Undercut angle (default: value from standard table)
R Undercut radius on both sides of the undercut (default:
value from standard table)
P1 Undercut oversize
No input: Machining in one cut
P>0: Division into pre-turning and finish-turning. P is
longitudinal oversize; the transverse oversize is preset
to 0.1 mm
ID Tool ID number

B Cylinder start chamfer (default: no start chamfer)
WB 1st cut angle (default: 45°)
RB First-cut radius (default: no input = no element): Positive
value: First cut radius, negative value = chamfer
G47 Safety clearance (see page 111)—evaluated only if "Omit
paths of rapid traverse" is active.
machining step

All parameters that you enter will be accounted for—even if the
standard table prescribes other values. If the parameters I, K, W and
R are not defined, the CNC PILOT determines these parameters from
"FP" in the standard table (see “DIN 76—undercut parameters” on
page 497).
Cycle run
to the cylinder starting point X1, or
for the thread chamfer
2 Machine thread chamfer, if defined
3 Finish cylinder up to beginning of undercut
4 Pre-machine undercut, if defined
5 Machine undercut
6 Finish to end point X2 on plane surface
7 Return
Without return: Tool remains at the end point on plane
surface
With return: Retracts and returns diagonally to starting point
246 Teach-in Mode

Undercut DIN 509 E
Select undercut DIN 509 E

The cycle machines a thread undercut according to DIN 509 type E, a

cylinder start chamfer, then the adjoining cylinder, and finishes with
the plane surface. You can define a finishing oversize for the area of
the cylinder. The cylinder chamfer is executed when you enter at least
one of the parameters cylinder 1st cut length or 1st cut radius.
Cycle parameters
X, Z Starting point
U Grinding oversize for the area of the cylinder (default: 0)
E Reduced feed rate for the plunge cut and the cylinder
ID Tool ID number
machining step

standard table prescribes other values. If the parameters I, K, W and
R are not defined, the CNC PILOT determines these parameters from
the cylinder diameter in the standard table (see “DIN 509 E – undercut
parameters” on page 499).
Cycle run
4 Machine undercut
6 Return
surface
With return: Retract and return diagonally to starting point
248 Teach-in Mode

Undercut DIN 509 F
Select undercut DIN 509 F

The cycle machines a thread undercut according to DIN 509 type F, a

cylinder start chamfer, then the adjoining cylinder, and finishes with
the plane surface. You can define a finishing oversize for the area of
the cylinder. The cylinder chamfer is executed when you enter at least
one of the parameters cylinder 1st cut length or 1st cut radius.
Cycle parameters
X, Z Starting point
U Grinding oversize for the area of the cylinder (default: 0)
E Reduced feed rate for the plunge cut and the cylinder
P2 Face depth (default: value from standard table)
A Face angle (default: value from standard table)
ID Tool ID number

machining step

standard table prescribes other values. If the parameters I, K, W, R, P
and A are not defined, the CNC PILOT determines these parameters
from the cylinder diameter in the standard table (see “DIN 509 F –
undercut parameters” on page 499).
Cycle run
4 Machine undercut
6 Return
surface
With return: Retract and return diagonally to starting point
250 Teach-in Mode

Examples of thread and undercut cycles
External thread and thread undercut
The machining operation is to be performed in two steps. The thread

undercut DIN 76 produces the undercut and thread chamfer. In the
second step, the thread cycle cuts the thread.
First step
The parameters for the undercut and thread chamfer are programmed
in two superimposed input windows.
Tool data
Second step
The Thread cycle (longitudinal)—expanded cuts the thread. The
cycle parameters define the thread depth and the proportioning of
cuts.
Tool data
Threading tool (for external machining)

Internal thread and thread undercut
The machining operation is to be performed in two steps. The thread

undercut DIN 76 produces the undercut and thread chamfer. In the
second step, the thread cycle cuts the thread.
First step
The parameters for the undercut and thread chamfer are programmed
in two superimposed input windows.
The CNC PILOT determines the undercut parameters from the
standard table.
For the thread chamfer, you only need to enter the chamfer width. The
angle of 45° is the default value for the 1st cut angle WB.
Tool data
Second step
The Thread cycle (longitudinal) cuts the thread. The thread pitch is
defined. The CNC PILOT automatically determines all other values
from the standard table.
You must pay attention to the setting of the Inner thread soft key.
Tool data
Threading tool (for internal machining)
252 Teach-in Mode

4.7 Drilling Cycles
4.7 Drilling Cycles
The drilling cycles allow you to machine axial and radial

holes.
For pattern machining, see “Drilling and Milling Patterns”
on page 297.
Drilling cycles Symbol

Axial/radial drilling cycle
For drilling single holes and
patterns
Axial/radial deep-drilling cycle

patterns
Axial/radial tapping cycle

patterns
Thread milling
For milling threads in an existing
hole

4.7 Drilling Cycles
Drilling, axial
Select drilling
Select drilling, axial
This cycle drills a hole on the face of the workpiece.

Cycle parameters
X, Z Starting point
C Spindle angle (C-axis position)
Z1 Starting point of hole (default: drilling starts from Z)
Z2 End point drill (end point of hole)
E Dwell time for chip breaking at end of hole
(default: 0)
D Retraction type
0: Rapid traverse
1: Feed rate
AB Drilling lengths (default: 0)
V Through drilling variants (default: 0)
0: No feed rate reduction
1: Feed rate reduction at the end of the hole
2: Feed rate reduction at the beginning of the hole
3: Feed rate reduction at the beginning and end of the
hole
SCK Safety clearance (see page 111)
G60 Deactivate the protective zone for the drilling operation
0: Active
1: Inactive
ID Tool ID number
machining step
254 Teach-in Mode

4.7 Drilling Cycles
Operating mode for technology database access depends on the tool
type:
Twist drill: Boring and drilling
Boring bar with indexable inserts: Pilot drilling
If "AB" and "V" are programmed, the feed rate is reduced

by 50 % during both pre-drilling and through-boring.
The CNC PILOT uses the tool parameter driven tool to
determine whether the programmed spindle speed and
feed rate apply to the spindle or the driven tool.
Cycle run
1 Position spindle to spindle angle C (in Manual mode, machining
starts from the current spindle angle)
2 If defined, move at rapid traverse to starting point of hole Z1
3 If defined, spot drill at reduced feed rate
4 Depending on spot and through drilling variant V:
Through-drilling reduction:
– Drill at programmed feed rate to position Z2 – AB
– Drill at reduced feed rate to hole end point Z2
No through drilling reduction:
– Drill at programmed feed rate to hole end point Z2
– Remain at end of hole for dwell time E, if defined
5 Retract
If Z1 is programmed, to hole starting point Z1
If Z1 is not programmed, to starting point Z

4.7 Drilling Cycles
Radial drilling
Select drilling
Select drilling, radial
This cycle drills a hole on the lateral surface of the workpiece.

Cycle parameters
X, Z Starting point
X1 Starting point of hole (default: drilling starts from X)
X2 End point drill (end point of hole)
(default: 0)
D Retraction type
0: Rapid traverse
1: Feed rate
hole
ID Tool ID number
machining step
256 Teach-in Mode

4.7 Drilling Cycles
type:

Cycle run
2 If defined, move at rapid traverse to hole starting point X1
3 If defined, spot drill at reduced feed rate
4 Depending on spot and through drilling variant V:
– Drill at programmed feed rate to position X2 – AB
– Drill at reduced feed rate to hole end point X2
– Drill at programmed feed rate to hole end point X2
5 Retract
If X1 is programmed, to hole starting point X1
If X1 is not programmed, to starting point X

4.7 Drilling Cycles
Deep-hole drilling, axial
Select drilling
Select deep-hole drilling, axial
The cycle produces a bore hole on the face in several passes. After
each pass, the drill retracts and, after a dwell time, advances again to
the first pecking depth, minus the safety clearance. You define the
first pass with 1st hole depth P. The drilling depth is reduced with
each subsequent pass by the reducing value, however, without
falling below the minimum drilling depth.
Cycle parameters
X, Z Starting point
P 1st hole depth (default: hole will be drilled in one pass)
IB Hole depth reduction value (default: 0)
JB Minimum hole depth (default: 1/10 of P)
B Retraction length (default: retract to starting point of hole)
(default: 0)
D Retraction—retraction speed and infeed within the hole
(default: 0)
0: Rapid traverse
1: Feed rate
hole
ID Tool ID number
G60 Deactivate the protective zone for the drilling operation
0: Active
1: Inactive
258 Teach-in Mode

4.7 Drilling Cycles
machining step

type:

Cycle run
3 First pass (pecking depth: P)—drill with reduced feed rate, if
defined
4 Retract by retraction length B—or to the hole starting point
and advance again to last pecking depth minus safety clearance
5 Next pass (pecking depth: “last depth – IB” or JB).
6 Repeat 4 to 5 until hole end point Z2 is reached
7 Last drilling pass—depending on spot and through-drilling
variant V:
– Drill at programmed feed rate to position Z2 – AB
– Drill at reduced feed rate to hole end point Z2
– Drill at programmed feed rate to hole end point Z2
8 Retract

4.7 Drilling Cycles
Deep-hole drilling, radial
Select drilling
Select deep hole, radial
The cycle produces a bore hole on the lateral surface in several

passes. After each pass, the drill retracts and, after a dwell time,
advances again to the first pecking depth, minus the safety clearance.
You define the first pass with 1st hole depth P. The drilling depth is
reduced with each subsequent pass by the reducing value, however,
without falling below the minimum drilling depth.
Cycle parameters
X, Z Starting point
P 1st hole depth (default: hole will be drilled in one pass)
IB Hole depth reduction value (default: 0)
JB Minimum hole depth (default: 1/10 of P)
B Retraction length (default: retract to starting point of hole)
(default: 0)
D Retraction—retraction speed and infeed within the hole
(default: 0)
0: Rapid traverse
1: Feed rate
hole
ID Tool ID number
260 Teach-in Mode

4.7 Drilling Cycles
machining step

type:

Cycle run
3 First pass (pecking depth: P)—drill with reduced feed rate, if
defined
4 Retract by retraction length B—or to the hole starting point
and advance again to last pecking depth minus safety clearance
5 Next pass (pecking depth: “last depth – IB” or JB).
6 Repeat 4 to 5 until hole end point X2 is reached
7 Last drilling pass—depending on spot and through-drilling
variant V:
– Drill at programmed feed rate to position X2 – AB
– Drill at reduced feed rate to hole end point X2
– Drill at programmed feed rate to hole end point X2
8 Retract

4.7 Drilling Cycles
Tapping, axial
Select drilling
Select tapping, axial
This cycle is used to tap a thread on the face of a workpiece.

Meaning of retraction length: Use this parameter for floating tap
holders. The cycle calculates a new nominal pitch on the basis of the
thread depth, the programmed pitch, and the retraction length. The
nominal pitch is somewhat smaller than the pitch of the tap. During
tapping, the drill is pulled away from the chuck by the retraction length.
With this method you can achieve higher service life from the taps.
Cycle parameters
X, Z Starting point
C Spindle angle (C-axis position)—(default: current spindle
position)
F1 Thread pitch (= feed rate) (default: feed rate from tool
definition)
B Run-in length to reach the programmed spindle speed and
feed rate (default: 2 * thread pitch F1)
SR Return speed for enabling rapid retraction (default: same
spindle speed as for tapping)
L Retraction length when using floating tap holders
(default: 0)
G60 Deactivate the protective zone for the drilling operation.
0: Active
1: Inactive
ID Tool ID number
machining step
Type of machining for technology database access: tapping
262 Teach-in Mode

4.7 Drilling Cycles
Cycle run
3 Tap thread to hole end point Z2
4 Retract at return speed SR
Tapping, radial
Select drilling
Select tapping, radial
This cycle is used to tap a thread on the lateral surface of a workpiece.

Meaning of retraction length: Use this parameter for floating tap
holders. The cycle calculates a new nominal pitch on the basis of the
thread depth, the programmed pitch, and the retraction length. The
nominal pitch is somewhat smaller than the pitch of the tap. During
tapping, the drill is pulled away from the chuck by the retraction length.
With this method you can achieve higher service life from the taps.
Cycle parameters
X, Z Starting point
position)
F1 Thread pitch (= feed rate) (default: feed rate from tool
definition)
B Run-in length to reach the programmed spindle speed and
feed rate (default: 2 * thread pitch F1)
SR Return speed for enabling rapid retraction (default: same
spindle speed as for tapping)
L Retraction length when using floating tap holders
(default: 0)

4.7 Drilling Cycles
G60 Protection zone—deactivates the protection zone for the
drilling process
0: Active
1: Inactive
ID Tool ID number
machining step
Type of machining for technology database access: tapping

Cycle run
3 Tap thread to hole end point X2
4 Retract at return speed SR
264 Teach-in Mode

4.7 Drilling Cycles
Thread milling, axial
Select drilling
Select thread milling, axial
The cycle mills a thread in existing holes.
Use threading tools for this cycle.
Be sure to consider the hole diameter and the diameter
of the milling cutter when programming approaching
radius R.
Cycle parameters
X, Z Starting point
position)
Z1 Starting point of thread (default: drilling starts from Z)
J Direction of thread
0: Right
1: Left
I Thread diameter
R Approaching radius [default: (I - milling diameter)/2]
H Cutting direction
0: Up-cut milling
1: Climb milling
V Milling method
0: The thread is milled in a 360-degree helix
1: The thread is milled in several helical paths (single-
point tool)

4.7 Drilling Cycles
ID Tool ID number
machining step
Type of machining for technology database access: Milling

Cycle run
2 Position the tool to thread end point Z2 (milling floor) inside the
hole
3 Approach on approach radius R
4 Mill the thread in a rotation of 360°, while advancing by the thread
pitch F1
5 Retract the tool and return it to the starting point
266 Teach-in Mode

4.7 Drilling Cycles
Examples of drilling cycles
Centric drilling and tapping
The machining operation is to be performed in two steps. In the first

step, the Drilling, axial cycle drills the hole. In the second, the
Tapping, axial cycle taps the thread.
The drill is positioned at the safety clearance to the workpiece surface
(starting point X, Z). The hole starting point Z1 is therefore not
programmed. In the parameters "AB" and "V," you program a feed
reduction.
The thread pitch is not programmed. The CNC PILOT uses the thread
pitch of the tool. The return speed SR ensures that the tool is
retracted quickly.
Tool data (drill)
I = 8.2 (drilling diameter)
B = 118 (point angle)
H = 0 (the tool is not a driven tool)
Tool data (tap)
I = 10 (thread diameter M10)
F = 1.5 (thread pitch)
H = 0 (the tool is not a driven tool)

4.7 Drilling Cycles
Deep-hole drilling
A hole is to be bored through the workpiece outside the turning center

with the cycle Deep-hole drilling, axial. This machining operation
requires a traversable spindle and driven tools.
The parameters 1st hole depth P and hole depth reduction value
IB define the individual passes, and the minimum hole depth JB limits
the hole reduction value.
As the return length B is not defined, the drill therefore retracts to
the starting point after each pass, remains there for the programmed
dwell time, and then advances again to the safety clearance for the
next pass.
Since this example is to illustrate how you drill a through hole, the hole
end point Z2 is programmed such that the tool has to drill all the way
through the workpiece before it reaches the end point.
The parameters "AB" and "V" define a feed reduction for both pre-
drilling and through-boring.
Tool data
I = 12 (drilling diameter)
B = 118 (point angle)
H = 1 (the tool is a driven tool)
268 Teach-in Mode

4.8 Milling Cycles
4.8 Milling Cycles
Milling cycles are used to machine axial and radial slots,

contours, pockets, surfaces and polygons.
For pattern machining, see “Drilling and Milling Patterns”
on page 297.
In Teach-in mode these cycles include the activation/deactivation of

the C axis and the positioning of the spindle.
In Manual mode you can activate the C axis with Rapid traverse
positioning and position the spindle before the actual milling cycle.
The milling cycles then automatically deactivate the C axis.
Milling cycles Symbol

Activate C axis; position tool and
spindle
Slot axial/radial
For milling single slots or slot
patterns
Figure axial/radial
For milling a single figure
Radial/axial ICP contour

For milling single ICP contours or
contour patterns
Face milling
For milling surfaces or polygons
Helical-slot milling, radial

For milling a helical slot

4.8 Milling Cycles
Rapid positioning milling
Select milling
The cycle activates the C axis and positions the spindle (C axis) and the
tool.
Rapid traverse positioning is only required in Manual

mode.
The C axis is deactivated by a subsequent manual
milling cycle.
Cycle parameters
X2, Z2 Target point
C2 End angle (C-axis position)—(default: current spindle
position)
machining step
Cycle run
1 Activate C axis
2 Insert the current tool
3 Position the tool at rapid traverse to the target point X2, Z2 and
the end angle C2
270 Teach-in Mode

4.8 Milling Cycles
Slot, axial
Select milling
Select slot, axial
This cycle mills a slot on the face of the workpiece. The slot width
equals the diameter of the milling cutter.
Cycle parameters
X, Z Starting point
X1 Slot target point in X (diameter value)
C1 Angle of slot target point (default: spindle angle C)
L Slot length
A1 Angle to X axis (default: 0)
Z1 Milling top edge (default: starting point Z)
Z2 Milling floor
P Infeed depth (default: total depth of one infeed)
FZ Approach feed (infeed rate) (default: active feed rate)
ID Tool ID number
machining step

Parameter combinations for the position and orientation of the slot:
X1, C1
L, A1

4.8 Milling Cycles
Cycle run
1 Activate the C axis and position to spindle angle C at rapid
traverse (only in Teach-in mode)
3 Approach at infeed rate FZ
4 Machine to end point of slot
6 Machine to starting point of slot
7 Repeat 3 to 6 until the milling depth is reached
8 Position to starting point Z and deactivate C axis
272 Teach-in Mode

4.8 Milling Cycles
Figure, axial
Select milling
Select figure, axial
Depending on the parameters, the cycle mills one of the following

contours or roughs/finishes a pocket on the face:
Rectangle (Q=4, L<>B)
Square (Q=4, L=B)
Circle (Q=0, RE>0, L and B: No input)
Triangle or polygon (Q=3 or Q>4, L<>0)
Cycle parameters (first input window)
X, Z Starting point
position)
X1 Diameter of figure center
C1 Angle of figure center (default: Spindle angle C)
Q Number of edges (default: 0)
Q=0: Circle
Q=4: Rectangle, square
Q=3: Triangle
Q>4: Polygon
L Length of edge
Rectangle: Length of rectangle
Square, polygon: Edge length
Polygon: L<0 inside circle diameter
Circle: No input
B Rectangle width
Rectangle: Width of rectangle
Square: L=B
Polygon, circle: No input
RE Rounding radius (default: 0)
Rectangle, square, polygon: Rounding radius
Circle: Radius of circle
A Angle to X axis (default: 0)
Rectangle, square, polygon: Position of figure
Circle: No input
P2 Milling depth

4.8 Milling Cycles
ID Tool ID number
Cycle parameters (second input window)

I Contour-parallel oversize
K Infeed-direction oversize
E Reduced feed rate for circular elements (default: active
feed rate)
O Roughing or finishing—only for pocket milling
0: Roughing
1: Finishing
H Cutting direction
0: Up-cut milling
1: Climb milling
U Overlap factor (range: 0 < U < 1)
U=0 or no input: Contour milling
U>0: Pocket milling—minimum overlap of milling paths
= U * milling diameter
JK Contour milling (input is evaluated only for contour milling)
0: On the contour
1: Within the contour
2: Outside the contour
JT Pocket milling (input is evaluated only for pocket milling)
0: From the inside out (from the inside towards the
outside)
1: From the outside in (from the outside towards the
inside)
R Approach radius (default: 0)
R=0: Contour element is approached directly; infeed to
starting point above the milling plane—then vertical
plunge.
R>0: Tool moves on approaching/departing arc that
connects tangentially to the contour element.
R<0 for inside corners: Tool moves on approaching/
departing arc that connects tangentially to the contour
element.
R<0 for outside corners: Length of linear approaching/
departing element; contour element is approached/
departed tangentially.
SCI Safety clearance in the working plane
SCK Safety clearance in infeed direction (see page 111)
274 Teach-in Mode

4.8 Milling Cycles
machining step
Notes on parameters/functions:
Machining of contour or pocket: defined with overlap
factor U
Milling direction: depends on definition or cutting
direction H and the direction of tool rotation (see
“Milling direction for contour milling” on page 293).
Milling cutter compensation: effective (except for
contour milling with J=0).
Approach and departure: For closed contours, the
starting point of the first element (in rectangles, the
longer element) is the point of approach and departure.
The tool approaches directly or on an arc according to
approaching radius R.
Contour milling JK defines whether the milling cutter
is to machine on the contour (center of milling cutter on
the contour) or on the inside/outside of the contour.
Pocket milling—roughing (O=0): Use JT to define
whether a pocket is machined from the inside toward
the outside, or vice versa.
Pocket milling—finishing (O=1): First, the edge of the
pocket is machined; then the pocket floor is machined.
With JT you define whether a pocket floor is to be
finished from the inside towards the outside, or vice
versa.

4.8 Milling Cycles
Cycle run
2 Calculate the proportioning of cuts (infeeds to the milling planes,
infeeds in the milling planes)
Contour milling:
3 Depending on the approaching radius R, approach the workpiece
and plunge to the first milling plane
4 Mill the first plane
5 Plunge to the next milling plane
Pocket milling—roughing:
3 Move to the safety clearance and plunge to the first milling plane
4 Depending on pocket milling JT, machine the milling plane
either from the inside towards the outside, or vice versa
Pocket milling—finishing:
4 Finish-machine the edge of the pocket—one working plane after
the other
5 Depending on pocket milling JT, finish the pocket floor either
from the inside towards the outside, or vice versa
6 Finish-machine the pocket at the programmed feed rate
All versions:
276 Teach-in Mode

4.8 Milling Cycles
ICP contour, axial
Select milling
Depending on the parameters, the cycle mills a contour or roughs/

finishes a pocket on the face.
X, Z Starting point
P2 Milling depth
feed rate)
FK ICP contour number
ID Tool ID number

0: Roughing
1: Finishing
H Cutting direction
0: Up-cut milling
1: Climb milling
U=0 or no input: Contour milling
0: On the contour

4.8 Milling Cycles
outside)
inside)
R Approach radius (default: 0)
plunge
connects tangentially to the contour element
element
departed tangentially
machining step
factor U.
contour milling with JK=0).
278 Teach-in Mode

4.8 Milling Cycles
Open contours are machined in direction of contour
definition. JK defines whether to move to the left or right
of the contour.
versa.
Cycle run
Contour milling:
the other
All versions:

4.8 Milling Cycles
Face milling
Select milling
Select the "Face milling" cycle
Depending on the parameters, the cycle mills the following contours

on the face.
One or two surfaces (Q=1 or Q=2, B>0)
Square (Q=4, L=B)
Triangle or polygon (Q=3 or Q>4, L<>0)
X, Z Starting point
X1 Diameter of figure center
Z2 Milling floor
Q Number of edges
Q=0: Circle
Q=1: One surface
Q=2: Two surfaces offset by 180°
Q=3: Triangle
Q>4: Polygon
L Length of edge
Polygon: L<0: Inside circle diameter
Circle: No input
B Width across flats:
For Q=1, Q=2: Remaining thickness (remaining
material)
Square, polygon (Q>=4): Width across flats (use only for
even number of surfaces; program "B" as an alternative
to "L")
Circle: No input
280 Teach-in Mode

4.8 Milling Cycles
Polygon (Q>2): Rounding radius
Circle (Q=0): Radius of circle
Polygon (Q>2): Position of figure
Circle: No input
ID Tool ID number

X2 Limit diameter
feed rate)
U Overlap factor (range: 0 < U < 1; default 0.5)
O Roughing or finishing
0: Roughing
1: Finishing
H Cutting direction
0: Up-cut milling
1: Climb milling
machining step

4.8 Milling Cycles
Cycle run
Roughing
4 Machine the milling plane, taking milling direction J
(unidirectional or bidirectional) into account
Finishing:
4 Finish-machine the edge of the island—one working plane after
the other
5 Finish-machine the floor from the outside towards the inside
All versions:
282 Teach-in Mode

4.8 Milling Cycles
Slot, radial
Select milling
Select "Slot, radial"
This cycle mills a slot on the lateral surface. The slot width equals the
diameter of the milling cutter.
X, Z Starting point
Z1 Slot target point
C1 Angle of slot target point (default: spindle angle C)
L Slot length
A Angle to Z axis (default: 0)
X1 Milling top edge (diameter) – (default: Starting point X)
X2 Milling floor
ID Tool ID number
machining step

Parameter combinations for the position and orientation of the slot:
X1, C1
L, A1

4.8 Milling Cycles
Cycle run
4 Mill to slot end point at programmed feed rate
6 Machine to starting point of slot
8 Position to starting point X and deactivate C axis
284 Teach-in Mode

4.8 Milling Cycles
Figure, radial
Select milling
Select "Figure, radial"
Depending on the parameters, the cycle mills one of the following

contours or roughs/finishes a pocket on the lateral surface:
Square (Q=4, L=B)
Triangle or polygon (Q=3 or Q>4, L>0 or L<0)
X, Z Starting point
position)
Z1 Figure center
Q Number of edges (default: 0)
Q=0: Circle
Q=3: Triangle
Q>4: Polygon
L Length of edge
Polygon: L<0 inside circle diameter
Circle: No input
B Rectangle width
Square: L=B
Polygon, circle: No input
Rectangle, square, polygon: Rounding radius
Circle: Radius of circle
Rectangle, square, polygon: Position of figure
Circle: No input
P2 Milling depth

4.8 Milling Cycles
ID Tool ID number

feed rate)
0: Roughing
1: Finishing
H Cutting direction
0: Up-cut milling
1: Climb milling
No input: Contour milling
0: On the contour
outside)
inside)
R Approach radius: Radius of approaching/departing arc
(default: 0)
plunge
element
286 Teach-in Mode

4.8 Milling Cycles
machining step
factor U.
versa.

4.8 Milling Cycles
Cycle run
Contour milling:
4 Depending on JT, machine a milling plane either from the inside
towards the outside, or vice versa
the other
5 Depending on JT, finish the pocket floor either from the inside
towards the outside, or vice versa
All versions:
288 Teach-in Mode

4.8 Milling Cycles
ICP contour, radial
Select milling
Select ICP contour, radial
Depending on the parameters, the cycle mills a contour or roughs/

finishes a pocket on the lateral surface.
X, Z Starting point
P2 Milling depth
feed rate)
FK ICP contour number
ID Tool ID number

0: Roughing
1: Finishing
H Cutting direction
0: Up-cut milling
1: Climb milling
No input: Contour milling
0: On the contour

4.8 Milling Cycles
outside)
inside)
R Approach radius: Radius of approaching/departing arc
(default: 0)
plunge
element
machining step
factor U.
290 Teach-in Mode

4.8 Milling Cycles
Open contours are machined in direction of contour
definition. JK defines whether to move to the left or right
of the contour.
versa.
Cycle run
Contour milling:
5 Plunge to the next milling plane.
the other
All versions:

4.8 Milling Cycles
Helical-slot milling, radial
Select milling
Select helical-slot milling, radial
The cycle mills a helical slot from the contour starting point to the
thread end point. The starting angle defines the starting position
for the slot. The slot width equals the diameter of the milling cutter.
Cycle parameters
X, Z Starting point
X1 Thread diameter
C1 Starting angle
Z1 Starting point of thread
F1 Thread pitch
F1 positive: Right-hand thread
F1 negative: Left-hand thread
U Thread depth
I Maximum infeed. The infeed movements are reduced
down to >= 0.5 mm according to the following calculation.
Following that, each infeed movement will amount to 0.5
mm.
Infeed 1: "I"
Infeed n: I * (1 – (n–1) * E)
E Cutting depth reduction
P Run-in length (ramp at the beginning of the slot)
K Run-out length (ramp at the end of the slot)
ID Tool ID number
machining step
292 Teach-in Mode

4.8 Milling Cycles
Cycle run
2 Calculate current infeed
3 Position the tool for the first pass
4 Machine up to the thread end point Z2 at the programmed feed
rate, taking the ramps at the beginning and end of the slot into
account
5 Return on paraxial path and approach for next pass
6 Repeat 4 to 5 until the slot depth is reached
Milling direction for contour milling

Cycle type Cutting direction Direction of tool rotation TRC Execution
Inside (JK=1) Up-cut milling (H=0) Mx03 Right
Inside Up-cut milling (H=0) Mx04 Left
Inside Climb milling (H=1) Mx03 Left
Inside Climb milling (H=1) Mx04 Right
outside (JK=2) Up-cut milling (H=0) Mx03 Right
Outside Up-cut milling (H=0) Mx04 Left
Outside Climb milling (H=1) Mx03 Left

4.8 Milling Cycles
Cycle type Cutting direction Direction of tool rotation TRC Execution
Outside Climb milling (H=1) Mx04 Right
Right (JK=2) For open contours without Without effect Right

function. Machining in
direction of contour
definition
Left (JK=1) For open contours without Without effect Left

function. Machining in
direction of contour
definition
294 Teach-in Mode

4.8 Milling Cycles
Milling direction for pocket milling
Milling direction for pocket milling
Direction of tool
Machining Cutting direction Machining direction Execution
rotation
Roughing Up-cut milling (H=0) From inside toward the outside Mx03
(JT=0)
Finishing
Roughing Up-cut milling (H=0) From inside toward the outside Mx04
(JT=0)
Finishing
Roughing Climb milling (H=0) From outside toward inside Mx03

(JT=1)
Roughing Up-cut milling (H=0) From outside toward inside Mx04

(JT=1)
Roughing Climb milling (H=1) From inside toward the outside Mx03
(JT=0)
Finishing
Roughing Climb milling (H=1) From inside toward the outside Mx04
(JT=0)
Finishing
Roughing Climb milling (H=1) From outside toward inside Mx03

(JT=1)
Roughing Up-cut milling (H=1) From outside toward inside Mx04

(JT=1)

4.8 Milling Cycles
Example of milling cycle
Milling on the face
In this example, a pocket is milled. The milling example in "9.8 ICP

Example, Milling Cycle" illustrates the complete machining process on
the face, including contour definition.
The machining process is performed with the cycle ICP contour,
axial. To describe a contour, define the basic contour first. Then
superimpose the rounding arcs.
Tool data (milling cutter)
I = 8 (milling diameter)
K = 4 (number of teeth)
TF = 0.025 (feed per tooth)
296 Teach-in Mode

4.9 Drilling and Milling Patterns
Note on using drilling/milling patterns:

Drilling patterns: The CNC PILOT generates the
machine commands M12, M13 (apply/release block
brake) under the following conditions: the drill/tap must
be entered as driven tool (parameters driven tool AW
and direction of rotation MD must be defined).
ICP milling contours: If the contour starting point is
outside the coordinate datum, the distance between
contour starting point and coordinate datum is added to
the pattern position (see “Examples of pattern
machining” on page 314).

Linear drilling pattern, axial
Drilling pattern linear, axial
Select drilling
Press the Pattern linear soft key
Press Pattern linear to machine drilling patterns in which the

individual features are arranged at a regular spacing in a straight line
on the face.
Cycle parameters
X, Z Starting point
position)
Q Number of holes
X1, C1 Starting point of pattern in polar coordinates
XK, YK Starting point of pattern in Cartesian coordinates
I, J End point of pattern in Cartesian coordinates
Ii, Ji: Pattern spacing (incremental)
The parameters of the hole are also requested.

Use the following parameter combinations to define the:
Starting point of pattern
X1, C1 or
XK, YK
Pattern positions:
Ii, Ji and Q
I, J and Q
298 Teach-in Mode

Cycle run
1 Positioning (depending on the machine configuration):
Without C axis: Position to spindle angle C
With C axis: Activate C axis and position to spindle angle C at
rapid traverse
Manual mode: Machining starts from current spindle angle
2 Calculate the pattern positions
3 Position to starting point of pattern
4 Execute drilling operation
5 Position for the next machining operation
6 Repeat steps 4 and 5 until all machining operations have been
completed
7 Return to starting point

Milling pattern linear, axial
Linear milling pattern, axial
Select milling
Select slot, axial
Press Pattern linear to machine milling patterns in which the

individual features are arranged at a regular spacing in a straight line
on the face.
Cycle parameters
X, Z Starting point
position)
Q Number of slots
X1, C1 Starting point of pattern in polar coordinates
XK, YK Starting point of pattern in Cartesian coordinates
I, J End point of pattern in Cartesian coordinates
Ii, Ji: Pattern spacing (incremental)
The parameters of the milling operation are also requested.

Use the following parameter combinations to define the:
Starting point of pattern
X1, C1 or
XK, YK
Pattern positions:
Ii, Ji and Q
I, J and Q
300 Teach-in Mode

Cycle run
rapid traverse
4 Execute the milling operation
completed

Drilling pattern circular, axial
Drilling pattern circular, axial
Select drilling
Press the Pattern circular soft key
Press Pattern circular to machine drilling patterns in which the

individual features are arranged at a regular spacing in a circle or
circular arc on the face.
Cycle parameters
X, Z Starting point
position)
Q Number of holes
XM, CM Center of pattern in polar coordinates
XK, YK Center of pattern in Cartesian coordinates
K Pattern diameter
A Angle of 1st hole (default: 0°)
Wi Angle increment (pattern spacing)—(default: holes are
arranged at a regular spacing in a circle)
The parameters for creating the hole are also requested.

Use the following parameter combinations to define the center of the
pattern:
XM, CM or
XK, YK
302 Teach-in Mode

Cycle run
rapid traverse
completed

Milling pattern circular, axial
Circular milling pattern, axial
Call the milling menu
Select slot, axial
Press Pattern circular to machine milling patterns in which the

circular arc on the face.
Cycle parameters
X, Z Starting point
position)
Q Number of slots
XM, CM Center of pattern in polar coordinates
XK, YK Center of pattern in Cartesian coordinates
K Pattern diameter
A Angle of 1st slot (default: 0°)
Wi Angle increment (pattern spacing) – (default: milling
operations are arranged at a regular spacing in a circle)
The parameters for creating the milling operation are also requested.
Use the following parameter combinations to define the center of the
pattern:
XM, CM or
XK, YK
304 Teach-in Mode

Cycle run
rapid traverse
completed

Drilling pattern linear, radial
Drilling pattern linear, radial
Select drilling
Press Pattern linear during drilling cycles to machine drilling patterns

in which the individual features are arranged at a regular spacing in a
straight line on the lateral surface.
Cycle parameters
X, Z Starting point
position)
Q Number of holes
Z1 Starting point of pattern (position of 1st hole)
ZE End point of pattern (default: Z1)
C1 Angle of 1st hole (starting angle)
You define the pattern position with end point of pattern and angle
increment or angle increment and number of holes.
The parameters of the hole also requested.
306 Teach-in Mode

Cycle run
rapid traverse
completed

Linear milling pattern, radial
Milling pattern linear, radial
Select milling
Select slot, radial
Press Pattern linear during milling cycles to machine milling patterns

in which the individual features are arranged at a regular spacing in a
straight line on the lateral surface.
Cycle parameters
X, Z Starting point
position)
Q Number of slots
Z1 Starting point of pattern (position of 1st slot)
ZE End point of pattern (default: Z1)
C1 Angle of 1st slot (starting angle)
You define the pattern position with end point of pattern and angle
increment or angle increment and number of slots.
The parameters of the milling operation are also requested.
308 Teach-in Mode

Cycle run
rapid traverse
completed

Drilling pattern circular, radial
Drilling pattern circular, radial
Select drilling
Press Pattern circular to machine drilling patterns in which the

circular arc on the lateral surface.
Cycle parameters
X, Z Starting point
position)
Q Number of slots
ZM, CM Center of pattern: Position, angle
K Pattern diameter
A Angle of 1st hole (default: 0°)
The parameters that are required for machining the respective

elements are also requested (see corresponding cycle descriptions).
310 Teach-in Mode

Cycle run
rapid traverse
completed

Circular milling pattern, radial
Milling pattern circular, radial
Select milling
Select slot, radial
Press Pattern circular to machine milling patterns in which the

circular arc on the lateral surface.
Cycle parameters
X, Z Starting point
position)
Q Number of slots
ZM, CM Center of pattern: Position, angle
K Pattern diameter
A Angle of 1st slot (default: 0°)
The parameters for programming the milling operation are also

requested (see corresponding cycle descriptions).
The starting point of a pattern to be assigned to an ICP

contour must lie on the positive XK axis.
312 Teach-in Mode

Cycle run
rapid traverse
completed

Examples of pattern machining
Linear hole pattern on face
A linear hole pattern is to be machined on the face of the workpiece

with the Drilling, axial cycle. This machining operation requires a
traversable spindle and driven tools.
The pattern is programmed by entering the coordinates of the first and
last hole, and the number of holes. Only the depth is indicated for the
drilling cycle.
Tool data
DV = 5 (drilling diameter)
BW = 118 (point angle)
AW = 1 (The tool is a driven tool)
314 Teach-in Mode

Circular hole pattern on face
A circular hole pattern is to be machined on the face of the workpiece

with the Drilling, axial cycle. This machining operation requires a
traversable spindle and driven tools.
The center of the pattern is entered in Cartesian coordinates.
Since this example is to illustrate how you drill a through hole, the hole
end point Z2 is programmed such that the tool has to drill all the way
through the workpiece before it reaches the end point. The
parameters "AB" and "V" define a feed reduction for both pre-drilling
and through-boring.
Tool data

Linear hole pattern on lateral surface
A linear hole pattern is to be machined on the lateral surface of the

workpiece with the Drilling, axial cycle. This machining operation
requires a traversable spindle and driven tools.
The drilling pattern is defined by the coordinates of the first hole, the
number of holes, and the spacing between the holes. Only the depth
is indicated for the drilling cycle.
Tool data
316 Teach-in Mode

4.10 DIN Cycles
4.10 DIN Cycles
DIN cycle
Select DIN cycle
This function allows you to select a DIN cycle (DIN subprogram) and
integrate it in a cycle program. The dialogs of the parameters defined
in the subprogram are then shown in the form.
The technology data that are programmed in the DIN cycle (in Manual
mode, the currently active technology data) become effective as soon
as you start the DIN subprogram. You can change the machine data
(T, S, F) at any time by editing the DIN subprogram.
Cycle parameters
L DIN macro number
Q Number of repetitions (default: 1)
LA-LF Transfer values
LH-LK Transfer values
LO-LP Transfer values
LR-LS Transfer values
LU Transfer value
LW-LZ Transfer values
LN Transfer value
ID Tool ID number
machining step

type:
Turning tool: Roughing
Button tool: Roughing
Threading tool: Thread turning
Recessing tool: Contour recessing
Tap: Tapping
Milling cutter: Milling

4.10 DIN Cycles
In the DIN subprogram you can assign texts and help
graphics to the transfer values (see "Subprograms"
Chapter in the "smart.Turn- and DIN Programming“ User's
Manual).
Cycle programming: With DIN subprograms, the zero
point shift is reset at the end of the cycle. Therefore, do
not use any DIN subprograms with zero point shifts in
cycle programming.
In the DIN cycle, no starting point is defined. Please
keep in mind that the tool moves on a diagonal path
from the current position to the first position that is
programmed in the DIN subprogram.
318 Teach-in Mode

ICP Programming

5.1 ICP Contours
5.1 ICP Contours
The Interactive Contour Programming (ICP) feature provides graphic
support when you are defining the workpiece contours. (ICP is the
abbreviation of "Interactive Contour Programming".) Contours created
with ICP are used in the following:
In ICP cycles (Teach-in, Manual Operation)
In smart.Turn
Each contour begins with a starting point. The following contours are
defined using linear and circular contour elements as well as form
elements like chamfers, rounding arcs, and undercuts.
ICP is called from smart.Turn and cycle dialogs.
ICP contours created in cycle mode are saved by the CNC PILOT in
independent files. You can enter file names (contour names) with up
to 40 characters. The ICP contours are integrated in ICP cycles. The
following contour types are possible:
Turning contours: *.gmi
Contours of workpiece blanks: *.gmr:
Milling contours on face: *.gms
Milling contours on lateral surface: *.gmm
The CNC PILOT integrates ICP contours created in smart.Turn into
the respective NC program. Contour descriptions are saved as
G commands.
In cycle mode, ICP contours created are managed in

independent files. These contours are machined
exclusively with ICP.
In smart.Turn, contours are part of the NC program.
They can be machined with the ICP editor or smart.Turn
editor.
Loading contours
ICP contours that you have created for cycle programs can be
loaded in smart.Turn. ICP converts the contours into G commands and
integrates them in the smart.Turn program. The contour is now part of
the smart.Turn program.
Contours that exist in DXF format can be imported with the ICP
editor. While they are imported, the contours are converted from DXF
format to ICP format. You can use DXF contours both for cycle
operation and for smart.Turn.
320 ICP Programming

5.1 ICP Contours
Form elements
Chamfers and rounding arcs can be inserted at each corner of the
contour.
Undercuts according to DIN 76, DIN 509 E, and DIN 509 F can be
inserted at paraxial, orthogonal contour corners. No deviations are
tolerated in elements in the X direction.
You can insert chamfers and rounding arcs at each corner of the
contour. Undercuts according to DIN 76, DIN 509 E, DIN 509 F are
only possible at paraxial, orthogonal contour corners. Here no
deviations are tolerated in horizontal elements (X direction).
You have the following alternatives for entering form elements:
Enter all contour elements, including the form elements, in the
sequence in which they are given in the workpiece drawing.
First define the rough contour without form elements. Then you
superimpose the form elements (see also “Superimposing form
elements” on page 335).
Machining attributes
You can assign the following attributes to the contour elements:
Parameters
U Oversize (additive to other oversizes)
The ICP generates a G52 Pxx H1.
F Special feed rate for finishing
The ICP generates a G95 Fxx.
D Number of the additive D compensation for the finishing
operation (D = 01 to 16).
The ICP generates a G149 D9xx.
Machining attributes are not modal!

5.1 ICP Contours
Calculation of contour geometry
The CNC PILOT automatically calculates all missing coordinates,
points of intersection, center points, etc. that can be derived
mathematically.
If the entered data permit several mathematically possible solutions,
you can inspect the individual solutions and select the proposal that
matches the drawing.
Each unresolved contour element is represented by a small symbol
below the graphic window. The control displays all contour elements
that can be drawn, even if they are not yet fully defined.
322 ICP Programming

5.2 ICP Editor in Cycle Mode
In cycle mode you can create:
Complex workpiece blank contours
Contours for turning
For ICP turning cycles
For ICP recessing cycles
For ICP recess-turning cycles
Complex contours for milling with the C axis
For the face
For the lateral surface
You activate the ICP editor with the Edit ICP soft key. This can only
be selected when editing ICP turning cycles or milling cycles or the
ICP workpiece blank contour cycle.
The description depends on the contour type. Using the cycle, ICP
distinguishes between:
Contour for turning or the workpiece blank contour: See “Contour
Elements of a Turning Contour” on page 342.
Contour for the face: See “Face Contours in smart.Turn” on
page 366.
Contour for the lateral surface: See “Lateral Surface Contours in
smart.Turn” on page 374.
If you create/edit two or more ICP contours in sequence,

the last edited "ICP contour number" is loaded to the cycle
after the ICP editor is exited.
Editing contours for cycles

The ICP contours of the cycle editing function are assigned names.
The contour name is the same as the file name. The contour name is
also used in the calling cycle.
You can define the contour name in the following ways:
Define the contour name in the cycle dialog before calling the ICP
editor (input field FK). ICP loads this name.
Define the contour name in the ICP editor. The input field FK has to
be empty when you call the ICP editor.
Load the existing contour. When you exit the ICP editor, the name
of the contour last edited is loaded into the input field FK.

Creating a new contour
Define the contour name in the cycle dialog and press

the Edit ICP soft key. The ICP editor switches to
entering the contour.
Press the Edit ICP soft key. The ICP editor opens the
window "Selection of ICP contours.“
Define the contour name in the "file name" field press

the Open soft key. The ICP editor switches to entering
the contour.
Press the Contour menu key.
Press the Insert element soft key.
The ICP waits for you to enter a contour name.
File organization with the ICP editor

In the file organization you can copy, rename or delete the ICP
contours.
Press the Edit ICP soft key.
Press the Contour list soft key. The ICP editor

opens the window "Selection of ICP contours."
Press the Organization soft key. The ICP editor

switches the soft-key row to the file organization
function.
324 ICP Programming

5.3 ICP Editor in smart.Turn
In smart.Turn you can make:
Blank contours and auxiliary blank contours
Finished part contours and auxiliary contours
Standard figures and complex contours for C-axis machining
on the face
on the lateral surface
Standard figures and complex contours for Y-axis machining
on the XY plane
on the YZ plane
Blank contours and auxiliary blank contours: You describe
complex blanks element by element—like finished parts. You select
the standard forms bar and tube and describe them with a few
parameters (see “Defining the Workpiece Blank” on page 341).
Figures and patterns for C and Y axis machining: You describe
complex milling contours element for element. The following standard
figures are prepared. You select the figures by menu and describe
them with a few parameters:
Circle
Rectangle
Polygon
Linear slot
Circular slot
Hole
You can arrange these figures and holes as linear or circular patterns
on the face or lateral surface as well as in the XY or YZ plane.
You can import DXF contours and integrate them in the smart.Turn
program.
You can load cycle programming contours and integrate them in the
smart.Turn program: smart.Turn supports the loading of the following
contours:
Workpiece blank description (extension *.gmr): Loaded as blank
contour or auxiliary blank contour
Contour for turning (extension *.gmi): Loaded as finished part
contour or auxiliary contour
Face contour (extension *.gms)
Lateral surface contour (extension *.gmm)
ICP uses G codes to describe the contours made in the

smart.Turn program.

Editing a contour in smart.Turn
Creating a blank contour
Press the ICP menu key, then in the ICP submenu

select Blank or Auxiliary blank.
Press the Contour menu key. The ICP editor switches

to entering the complex blank contour.
Press the Bar menu key.
Describe the standard workpiece blank "bar."
Press the Tube menu key.
Describe the standard workpiece blank "tube."
Making a new contour for turning
Press the ICP menu key, then in the ICP submenu,

select the contour type.
The ICP waits for you to enter a contour name.
326 ICP Programming

Loading a contour from the cycle editing
Press the ICP menu key, then in the ICP submenu,

select the contour type.
Press the contour list soft key. The ICP editor

shows the list of the contours created in cycle mode.
Select and load the contour.
Editing an existing contour
Position the cursor in the corresponding program section.
Press the ICP menu key, then:
.. Select Contour editing in the ICP submenu.
Press the Change ICP contour soft key.
The ICP editor displays the selected existing contour for subsequent
editing.

5.4 Creating an ICP Contour
An ICP contour consists of individual contour elements. You program Soft keys in the ICP editor main menu
the contour by entering the individual contour elements one after the
other in the correct sequence. The starting point is defined before Opens the file selection dialog for ICP
you describe the first contour element. The end point is determined contours.
by the target point of the last contour element.
Inverts the definition direction of the
The contour elements / subcontours are displayed as soon as they are
contour.
programmed. With the zoom and panning functions, you can adjust
the graphics as required.
Retroactively inserts form elements.
The principle described in the following applies for all ICP contours
regardless of whether they are used for cycle programming,
smart.Turn, for turning or for milling. Adds an element to the existing
contour.
Returns to the dialog that has called

ICP.
Entering an ICP contour

If the contour is new, the CNC PILOT asks first for the coordinates of
the contour starting point. Menu items of the lines menu
Linear contour element: Use the menu symbol to select the Line with angle in displayed
direction of the element and assign it a dimension. When defining quadrant
horizontal and vertical linear elements, it is not necessary to enter the
X and Z coordinates, respectively, provided that there are no Horizontal line in displayed
unresolved elements. direction
Circular contour elements: Use the menu symbol to select the Line with angle in displayed
direction of arc rotation and give the arc a dimension. quadrant
After selecting a contour element, you enter the known parameters.
The CNC PILOT automatically calculates parameters that have not Vertical line in displayed
been defined from the adjoining contour elements. You usually direction
program the contour elements with the dimensions given in the
production drawing. Call the form element menu
During input of linear or circular elements, the control does display the
starting point, but it is not editable. The starting point is the end Menu items of arcs menu
point of the preceding element.
Circular arc in the displayed
You can toggle between the lines and arcs menus by soft key. Form direction
elements (chamfers, rounding arcs, and undercuts) are selected with
the menu key. Call the form element menu
328 ICP Programming

Soft keys for switching between lines menus
CREATING AN ICP CONTOUR and arcs menus
Select the line menu
Select the arc menu

Specify the starting point.
Select the line menu.
Select the arc menu.
Select the "Form elements" menu item.
Select the element type and enter the known parameters of the
contour element.
Absolute or incremental dimensioning

The setting of the Increment soft key determines which type of Soft key switchover for incremental
coordinate is active. Incremental parameters will have the appendix "i"
(Xi, Zi, etc.). Activates the incremental dimension
for the current value
Transitions between contour elements

A transition between two contour elements is called tangential when Soft key for tangential transition
one contour element makes a smooth and continuous transition to the
next. There is no visible kink or corner at the intersection. With Activates the tangential condition for
geometrically complex contours, tangential transitions are useful for the transition in the end point of the
reducing the input of dimensional data to a minimum and eliminating contour element
the possibility of mathematically contradictory entries.
To be able to calculate unresolved contour elements, the CNC PILOT
must know the type of transition that connects the contour elements.
The transition to the next contour element is determined by soft key.
Error messages that occur during definition of the ICP

contour are often caused by "forgotten" tangential
transitions.

Polar coordinates
Entry of Cartesian coordinates is expected as standard. With the soft Soft keys for polar coordinates
keys for polar coordinates you switch individual coordinates to polar
coordinates. Switches the field to entering the
angle W.
You can mix Cartesian coordinates and polar coordinates to define a
point.
Switches the field to entering the
radius P.
Angular input
Select the desired angle input by soft key. Soft keys for angular input
Linear elements Angle to successor
AN Angle to the Z axis(AN<=90°—within the preselected
quadrants)
ANn Angle to the following element Angle to predecessor
ANp Angle to the previous element
Circular arcs
ANs Tangential angle in the starting point of the circle
ANe Tangential angle in the end point of the circle
ANn Angle to the following element
330 ICP Programming

Contour graphics
As soon as you have entered a contour element, the CNC PILOT
checks whether the element is resolved or unresolved.
A resolved element is a contour element that is fully and
unambiguously defined. It is drawn immediately.
An unresolved element has not yet been fully defined by the
entered data. Use of the ICP editor:
It places a symbol below the graphics window. It reflects the
element type and the line direction / direction of rotation.
Represents an unresolved linear element if the starting point and
direction are known.
Represents an unresolved circular element as a full circle if the
circle center and the radius are known.
As soon as it can be calculated, the CNC PILOT converts an
unresolved contour element to a resolved contour element. The
symbol is then deleted.
An incorrect contour element is displayed if possible. In addition, an
error message is issued.
Unresolved contour elements: If during further contour input an
error results because there is not enough information for a contour
element, the unresolved element can be selected and the missing
information added.
If a contour contains "unresolved" contour elements, the "resolved"
elements cannot be changed. You can, however, set or delete the
"tangential transition" for the contour element located directly before
the unresolved contour area.
If the element to be edited is an unresolved element,

the associated symbol is marked "selected."
The element type and the direction of rotation of a
circular arc cannot be changed. In this case, the contour
element has to be deleted and then added.

Selection of solutions
If the data entered for unresolved contour elements permit several
possible solutions, you can check all mathematically possible solutions
with the Next solution / Previous solution soft keys. You then
confirm the correct solution by soft key.
If the contour still contains unsolved contour elements

when you exit the editing mode, the CNC PILOT will ask
you whether to discard these elements.
Colors in contour graphics

Resolved and unresolved contour elements as well as selected
contour elements, selected contour corners, and remaining contours
are depicted in different colors. (The selection of contour elements /
contour corners and remaining contours is important when you are
editing ICP contours.)
Colors:
White: Workpiece blank contour, auxiliary blank contour
Yellow: Finished part contours (turned contours, contour for C and Y
axis machining)
Blue: auxiliary contours
Gray: For unresolved or incorrect but displayable elements
Red: Selected solution, selected element or selected corner
332 ICP Programming

Selection functions
In the ICP editor, the CNC PILOT provides various functions for
selecting contour elements, form elements, contour corners and Selecting contour elements
contour areas. You can call these functions by soft key. Next element (or the left arrow key)
selects the next element in the direction
Selected contour corners or contour elements are shown in red. of contour definition.
Selecting a contour area
Previous element (or the right arrow key)
selects the previous element in the
Select the first element of the contour section. direction of contour definition.
Select range: Activates the range
selection.
Activate the section selection.
Selecting contour corners (for form elements)

Next contour edge (or the left arrow key)
Press the Next element soft key, until the entire selects the next corner in the direction of
section is marked. contour definition.
Previous contour edge (or the right
Press the Previous element soft key, until the entire arrow key) selects the previous corner in
section is marked. the direction of contour definition.
Mark all corners: Marks all contour
corners.
Corner selection: If the corner selecting

function is activated, multiple contour
corners can be marked.
Mark: If the corner selecting function is
active, individual contour corners can be
selected and marked or unmarked with
this soft key.

Contour direction (cycle programming)
The cutting direction during cycle programming depends on the
direction of the contour. If the contour is described in the –Z direction,
a tool with the orientation 1 must be used for longitudinal machining.
(See “General tool parameters” on page 440.) The cycle used
determines whether machining is transverse or longitudinal.
If the contour is described in the –X direction, a tool with the
orientation 3 must be used for transverse machining.
ICP cut, longitudinal/transverse (roughing): The CNC PILOT
machines the workpiece in the contour direction.
ICP finishing, longitudinal/transverse: the CNC PILOT finishes in
the contour direction.
An ICP contour which was defined for a roughing

operation with the "ICP cut longitudinal" cycle cannot be
used for machining with the "ICP cut transverse" cycle.
Reverse the contour direction with the Turn contour soft
key.
Soft keys in the ICP editor main menu

Inverts the definition direction of the
contour.
334 ICP Programming

5.5 Editing ICP Contours
The CNC PILOT offers the following possibilities for extending or
changing a programmed contour.
Superimposing form elements
Press the soft key.
Select the desired form element.
Select the corner to be changed.
Confirm the corners for the form element and enter

the data for the form element.
Adding contour elements

You can add to an ICP contour by entering additional contour
elements that are "appended" to the existing contour. A small square
indicates the end of the contour and an arrow indicates the direction.
Press the soft key.
"Append" additional contour elements to the existing contour.

Editing or deleting the last contour element
To edit the last contour element: When the Change last soft key is
pressed the data of the "last" contour element are presented for
editing.
Depending on the adjoining contour elements, corrections of linear or
circular elements are either transferred immediately or the corrected
contour is displayed for inspection. ICP highlights the affected contour
elements in color. If the change permits several possible solutions,
you can check all mathematically possible solutions with the Next
solution / Previous solution soft keys.
The change will not become effective until you confirm by soft key. If
you discard the change, the old description becomes effective again.
The type of contour element (linear or circular element), the direction
of a linear element, or the direction of rotation of a circular element
cannot be changed. Should this be necessary, you must delete the
element and add a new contour element.
To delete the last contour element: When the delete last soft key
is pressed the data of the "last" contour element are discarded. You
can use this function repeatedly to delete several successive contour
elements.
Deleting a contour element
Press Manipulate. The menu displays functions for

trimming, editing and deleting contours.
Menu item Delete ...
Select ... Element/range.
Select the contour element to be deleted.
Delete the contour element.
You can delete several successive contour elements.
336 ICP Programming

Editing contour elements
The CNC PILOT provides various ways to change an existing contour.
The procedure is illustrated in the following example of editing the
length of an element. The other functions work similar to the
procedure described here.
The following editing functions are available for existing contour
elements.
Trimming
Length of element
Length of contour (only for closed contours)
Radius
Diameter
Change
Contour element
Form element
Delete
Element/Range
Move element/range as well
Contour/Pocket/Figure/Pattern
Form element
All form elements

Changing the length of the contour element

Menu item Edit ...
... Select the contour element.
Select the contour element to be edited.
Present the selected contour element for editing.
Make the changes.
Load the changes.
The contour or, if applicable, the possible solutions are displayed for
inspection. Changes in form elements and unresolved elements are
loaded immediately (original contour in yellow, changed contour in red
for comparison).
Load the desired solution.
338 ICP Programming

Changing the paraxial line
When changing a paraxial line, an additional soft key is offered with
which you can change the second end point as well. From an originally
straight line you can make a diagonal in order to make corrections.
Changing the "fixed" end point. By pressing

repeatedly you select the direction of the diagonal.
Shifting a contour

Menu item Edit ...
... Select the contour element.
Select the contour element to be edited.
Present the selected contour element for moving.
Enter the new starting point of the reference element.
Assume the new starting point (= new position). The

CNC PILOT shows the shifted contour.
Confirm the new position for the contour.

5.6 The Zoom Function in the ICP Editor
5.6 The Zoom Function in the ICP
Editor
The zoom functions make it possible to changes the visible section by
using soft keys, the arrow keys, and the PgUp and PgDn keys. The
zoom function can be called in all ICP windows.
The CNC PILOT sizes the graphic section depending on the
programmed contour. With the zoom function you can select another
graphic section.
Changing the view

Modifying the section by using keys
8 The displayed section can be modified with the arrow keys, the
PgUp key and the PgDn key without opening the zoom menu.
Keys for modifying the displayed section

The arrow keys move the workpiece in the
indicated direction.
Reduces the displayed workpiece (zoom –).
Magnifies the displayed workpiece (zoom +).
Soft keys in the zoom menu

Modifying the section with the zoom menu
Activates the zoom function.
8 If the zoom function is selected, a red rectangle appears in the
contour window. This red frame indicates the zoom area, which you
can select using the Take over soft key or the Enter key. Use the Extends the displayed section directly
following keys to change the frame size and position: (zoom –).
Keys for modifying the red frame Switches back to the standard screen
The arrow keys move the frame in the indicated section and closes the zoom menu.
direction.
Switches to the last screen section
selected.
Applies the area selected by the red

Reduces the displayed frame (zoom +). frame as the new section and closes
the zoom menu.
Enlarges the displayed frame (zoom -). Closes the zoom menu without
changing the selected section.
340 ICP Programming

5.7 Defining the Workpiece Blank
5.7 Defining the Workpiece Blank
In smart.Turn, the standard forms "bar" and "tube" are described with
a G function.
"Bar" blank
The function describes a cylinder.
Parameters
X Cylinder diameter
Z Length of the blank
K Right edge (distance between workpiece zero point and right
edge)
ICP generates in smart.Turn a G20 in the BLANK section.
"Tube" blank
The function describes a hollow cylinder.
Parameters
X Diameter of hollow cylinder
Z Length of the blank
K Right edge (distance between workpiece zero point and right
edge)
I Inside diameter
ICP generates in smart.Turn a G20 in the BLANK section.

5.8 Contour Elements of a Turning Contour
5.8 Contour Elements of a Turning
Contour
With the "contour elements of a turning contour" you can create the
following:
In cycle mode
Complex workpiece blank contours
Contours for turning
In smart.Turn
Complex blank contours and auxiliary blank contours
Finished part contours and auxiliary contours
Basic elements of a turning contour

Starting point
Parameters
XS, ZS Starting point of contour
W Polar starting point of contour (angle)
P Polar starting point of contour (radius)
In smart.Turn, ICP generates a G0.
342 ICP Programming

Vertical lines
Select the line direction.
Enter the line dimensions and define the transition to the next
element.
Parameters
X Target point
Xi Incremental target point (distance from starting point to
target point)
W Polar target point (angle)
P Polar target point (radius)
L Length of the line
U, F, D: See machining attributes Page 321
Horizontal lines
element.
Parameters
Z Target point
Zi Incremental target point (distance from starting point to
target point)

Line at angle
element. Always enter the angle AN (<=90°) within the selected
quadrant.
Parameters
X, Z Target point
Xi, Zi: Incremental target point (distance from starting point to
target point)
AN Angle to Z axis
ANn Angle to the subsequent element
344 ICP Programming

Circular arc
Select the arc’s direction of rotation.
Enter the arc dimensions and define the transition to the next element.
Parameters
X, Z Target point (end point of the circular arc)
Xi, Zi: Incremental target point (distance from starting point to
target point)
Wi Incremental polar target point and angle (relative to the
starting point)
Pi Incremental polar target point (distance from starting point
to target point)
I, K Center of arc
Ii, Ki Incremental center of arc (distance from starting point to
center in X, Z direction)
PM Polar center of arc (radius)
PMi Incremental polar center (distance from starting point to
center)
WM Polar center of arc (angle)
WMi Incremental polar center and angle (relative to the starting
point)
R Radius
ANs Tangential angle in the starting point
ANe Tangential angle in the target point
ICP generates a G2 or G3 in smart.Turn.

Contour form elements
Chamfer/rounding arc
Select the form elements.
Select a chamfer.
Select rounding arc.
Enter the chamfer width BR or the rounding radius BR.
Chamfer/rounding arc as first element: Enter element position AN.
Parameters
BR Chamfer width/rounding radius
AN Element position
Chamfers/rounding arcs are defined on contour corners. A "contour
corner" is the point of intersection between the approaching and
departing contour elements. A chamfer or rounding cannot be
calculated until the departing contour element is known.
ICP integrates the chamfer/rounding arc in smart.Turn on the basic
element G1, G2 or G3.
Contour begins with a chamfer or a rounding arc: Enter the
position of the intended corner as starting point. Then, in the form
element menu, select chamfer or rounding arc. Since the introducing
contour element is missing, you enter the element position AN to
clearly define the position of the chamfer or rounding arc.
Example of an outside chamfer at start of contour: If you program
"element position AN=90°," the imaginary approaching reference
element is a transverse element in the positive +X axis direction (see
figure).
ICP converts a chamfer or rounding arc at the start of the contour to a
linear or circular element.
346 ICP Programming

Thread undercut DIN 76
Select Undercut DIN 76.
Enter the undercut parameters.
Parameters
FP Thread pitch (default: value from standard table)
I Undercut depth (radius) (default: value from standard
table)
R Undercut radius (default: value from standard table)
Parameters that are not defined are automatically calculated by the
CNC PILOT from the standard table (see “DIN 76—undercut
parameters” on page 497):
The "thread pitch FP" is determined from the diameter.
The parameters I, K, W, and R are calculated from the thread pitch
FP.
If you are programming an internal thread, it is advisable

to preset the thread pitch FP, since the diameter of the
longitudinal element is not the thread diameter. If you
have CNC PILOT calculate the thread pitch
automatically, slight deviations may occur.
Undercuts can be programmed only between two linear
elements. One of the two linear elements must be
parallel to the X axis.

Undercut DIN 509 E
Select undercut DIN 509 E.
Parameters
table)
The CNC PILOT calculates unentered parameters automatically from
the diameter in the standard table (see “DIN 509 E – undercut

elements. One of the two linear elements must be parallel
to the X axis.
348 ICP Programming

Undercut DIN 509 F
Select undercut DIN 509 F.
Parameters
table)
P Face depth (default: value from standard table)
A Face angle (default: value from standard table)
The CNC PILOT calculates unentered parameters automatically from
the diameter in the standard table (see “DIN 509 F – undercut

to the X axis.

Undercut type U
Select the undercut type U.
Parameters
I Undercut depth (radius)
K Undercut length
R Undercut radius
P Chamfer/rounding

to the X axis.
350 ICP Programming

Undercut type H
Select the undercut type H.
Parameters
K Undercut length
R Undercut radius
W Plunging angle

to the X axis.

Undercut type K
Select the undercut type K.
Parameters
I Undercut depth
R Undercut radius
W Angular length
A Plunging angle

to the X axis.
352 ICP Programming

5.9 Contour Elements on Face
With the "contour elements of a face" you can create complex milling Soft keys for polar coordinates
contours.
Cycle mode: Contour for axial ICP milling cycles angle C.
smart.Turn: Contour for machining with the C axis
Enter the dimensions of the front face contour elements in Cartesian Switches the field to entering the
or polar values. You can switch between them by pressing a soft key radius P.
(see table). You can mix Cartesian coordinates and polar coordinates
to define a point.
Starting point of face contour
Parameters
XKS, YKS Starting point of contour
C Polar starting point of contour (angle)

Vertical lines on face
element.
Parameters
YK Cartesian target point
YKi Incremental target point (distance from starting point to
target point)
C Polar target point (angle)
P Polar target point
L Length of line
F: See machining attributes Page 321
Horizontal lines on face
element.
Parameters
XK Cartesian target point
XKi Incremental target point (distance from starting point to
target point)
L Length of line
354 ICP Programming

Line at angle on face
element.
Parameters
XK, YK Cartesian target point
XKi, YKi Incremental target point (distance from starting point to
target point)
AN Angle to XK axis (for direction of angle, see help graphic)
L Length of line

Circular arc on face
Parameters
XK, YK Target point (end point of the circular arc)
XKi, YKi Incremental target point (distance from starting point to
target point)
to target point)
Ci Incremental polar target point and angle (relative to the
starting point)
I, J Center of arc
Ii, Ji: Incremental center of arc (distance from starting point to
center in X, Z)
PM Polar center of arc
center)
CM Polar center of arc (angle)
CMi Incremental polar center and angle (relative to the starting
point)
R Radius
356 ICP Programming

Chamfer/rounding arc on the face
Select a chamfer.
Parameter
AN Element position

5.10 Contour Elements on Lateral Surface
5.10 Contour Elements on Lateral
Surface
With the "contour elements of a lateral surface" you can create Soft keys for polar coordinates
complex milling contours.
Switches the field from linear
Cycle mode: Contour for radial ICP milling cycles dimensions to entry of the angle C.
smart.Turn: Contour for machining with the C axis
Enter the dimensions of the lateral surface contour elements in Switches the field to entering the
Cartesian or polar values. You can use the linear dimension as an polar dimension P.
alternative to the angular dimension. You can switch between them by
pressing a soft key (see table).
The linear dimension is essentially the unrolled surface at

the reference diameter.
For lateral surface contours, the reference diameter is
specified in the cycle. The linear dimensions of all
subsequent contour elements are referenced to this
diameter.
When called from smart.Turn, the reference diameter in
the reference data is requested.
Starting point of lateral surface contour
Parameters
ZS Starting point of contour
CYS Starting point of the contour as linear dimension
(reference: diameter XS)
P Polar starting point of contour
C Polar starting point of contour (angle)
358 ICP Programming

Vertical lines on lateral surface
element.
Parameters
CY Target point as linear dimension (reference: diameter XS)
CYi Incremental target point as linear dimension (reference:
diameter XS)
P Target point as polar radius
Ci Incremental polar target point – angle
L Length of line
Horizontal lines on lateral surface
element.
Parameters
Z Target point
Zi Incremental target point
L Length of line

Line at angle on lateral surface
Direction of the line
element.
Parameters
Z Target point
diameter XS)
Ci Incremental polar target point – angle
AN Angle to Z axis (for direction of angle, see help graphic)
L Length of line
360 ICP Programming

Circular arc, lateral surface
Parameters
Z Target point
diameter XS)
to target point)
Ci Incremental polar target point and angle (relative to the
starting point)
K Center point in Z
Ki Incremental center point in Z
CJ Center as linear dimension (reference: diameter XS)
CJi Incremental center point as linear dimension (reference:
diameter XS)
center)
point)
R Radius
L Length of line

Chamfers/rounding arcs on a lateral surface
Select a chamfer.
Parameters
AN Element position
362 ICP Programming

5.11 C and Y Axis Machining in smart.Turn
5.11 C and Y Axis Machining in
smart.Turn
In smart.Turn, ICP supports the definition of milling contours and holes
as well as the creation of milling and drilling patterns that are machined
with the aid of the C or Y axis.
Before you use ICP to describe a milling contour or a hole, select the
plane:
C axis
Face (XC plane)
Lateral surface (ZC plane)
Y axis
Y face (XY plane)
Y lateral surface (YZ plane)
A hole can contain the following elements:
Centering
Core hole
Countersink
Thread
The parameters are evaluated for drilling or tapping.
You can arrange holes in linear or circular patterns.
Milling contours: The CNC PILOT is familiar with standard figures
(full circle, polygon, slot, etc.). You can define these figures with a few
parameters. Complex contours are described with lines and circular
arcs.
You can arrange standard figures in linear or circular patterns.

Reference data, nested contours
When describing a milling contour or hole you specify the reference
plane. The reference plane is the position on which the milling contour
or the hole is created.
Face (C axis): The Z position (reference dimension)
Lateral surface (C axis): The X position (reference diameter)
XY plane (Y axis): The Z position (reference dimension)
YZ plane (Y axis): The X position (reference diameter)
It is also possible to nest milling contours and holes. Example:
Defining a slot in a rectangular pocket. Holes are drilled inside this slot.
You use the reference plane to specify the positions of these
elements.
ICP supports the selection of the reference plane. The following Soft keys and nested contours
reference data are loaded during selection of a reference plane.
Switches to the next contour of the
Face: Reference dimension same reference plane.
Lateral surface: Reference diameter
XY plane: Reference dimension, spindle angle, limit diameter Switches to the previous contour of
YZ plane: Reference dimension, spindle angle the same reference plane.
Switches to the next nested contour.

Selecting a reference plane
Select contour, figure, hole, pattern, single surface or polygon. Switches to the previous nested
contour.
Press the Select reference plane soft key. ICP

displays the finished part and, if available, the
contours already defined.
Use the soft keys (see table at right) to select the reference
dimension, reference diameter or existing milling contour as reference
plane.
Confirm the reference plane. ICP loads the values of

the reference plane as reference data.
Complete the reference data and describe the contour, figure, hole,
pattern, single surface or polygon.
364 ICP Programming

Representation of the ICP elements in the
smart.Turn program
Each ICP dialog in smart.Turn programs is followed by a section Example: "Rectangle on the face"
code of further G commands. A hole or milling contour (standard figure
and complex contour) contains the following commands: . . .
Section code (with reference data of this section): FRONT Z0
FRONT (XC plane) N 100 G308 ID“FACE_1“ P-5
SURFACE (ZC plane) N 101 G305 XK40 YK10 A0 K30 B15
FACE_Y (XY plane) N 102 G309
SURFACE_Y (ZY plane)
G308 (with parameters) as "beginning of the reference plane"
G function of the figure or hole; sequence of commands with Example: "Nested figures"
patterns or complex contours
. . .
G309 as "end of a reference plane."
FRONT Z0
In nested contours a reference plane begins with G308, the next
reference plane with the next G308, etc. When the deepest level is N 100 G308 ID"FACE_2" P-5
finally reached, this reference plane is concluded with G309. Then the N 101 G307 XK-40 YK-40 Q5 A0 K-50
next reference plane is concluded with G309 etc.
N 102 G308 ID"FACE_12" P-3
Note the following points if you describe milling contours or holes with
G commands and then machine them with ICP: N 103 G301 XK-35 YK-40 A30 K40 B20
Some parameters are redundant in the DIN contour description. For N 104 G309
example, the milling depth can be programmed in the G308 and/or N 105 G309
in the G function of the figure. This redundancy does not appear in
ICP.
In DIN programming of figures you have the choice between a
Cartesian or polar center dimensioning. The center of the figures is
entered in ICP in Cartesian coordinates.
Example: In the DIN contour description, the milling depth is
programmed in G308 and in the figure definition. If this figure is
changed with ICP, it overwrites the milling depth from G308 with the
milling depth from the figure. When saving, ICP saves the milling
depth in G308. The G function of the figure is saved without milling
depth.
If you use ICP to edit contour descriptions that were

created with G functions, redundant parameters are
lost.
If you load a figure with a center in polar dimensions, the
center is converted to Cartesian coordinates.

5.12 Face Contours in smart.Turn
In smart.Turn, ICP provides the following contours for machining with
the C axis:
Complex contours defined with individual contour elements
Figures
Holes
Pattern of figures or holes
Reference data for complex face contours

The reference data follows the contour definition with individual
contour elements: See “Contour Elements on Face” on page 353.
Reference data of face
ID Contour name
PT Milling depth
ZR Reference dimension
You can find the reference dimension ZR with the "select reference
plane" function (see page 364).
ICP generates:
The FRONT section code with the reference dimension parameter.
In nested contours, ICP generates only one section code.
A G308 with the parameters contour name and milling depth.
A G309 at the end of the contour description.
366 ICP Programming

Circle on face

ID Contour name
PT Milling depth
Parameters of figure
XKM, YKM Center of figure (Cartesian coordinates)
R Radius
ICP generates:
A G304 with the parameters of the figure.
A G309.

Rectangle on face

ID Contour name
PT Milling depth
A Position angle (reference: XK axis)
K Length
B Width
BR Rounding arc
ICP generates:
A G309.
368 ICP Programming

Polygon on face

ID Contour name
PT Milling depth
Q Number of corners
K Length of edge
Ki Width across flats (inscribed circle diameter)
BR Rounding arc
ICP generates:
A G309.

Linear slot on face

ID Contour name
PT Milling depth
K Length
B Width
ICP generates:
A G309.
Circular slot on face

ID Contour name
PT Milling depth
A Starting angle (reference: XK axis)
W Position angle (reference: XK axis)
R Curvature radius (reference: center point path of the
slot)
Q2 Direction of rotation
CW
CCW
B Width
ICP generates:
A G302 or G303 with the parameters of the figure.
A G309.
370 ICP Programming

Hole on face
This function defines a single hole that can contain the following
elements:
Centering
Core hole
Countersink
Thread
Reference data of hole
ID Contour name
Parameters of the hole
XKM, YKM Center of hole (Cartesian coordinates)
Centering
O Diameter
Hole
B Diameter
BT Depth (without algebraic sign)
W Angle
Countersink
R Diameter
U Depth
E Sinking angle
Thread
GD Diameter
GT Depth
K Run-out length
F Thread pitch
GA Thread type (right-hand/left-hand)
0: Right-hand thread
1: Left-hand thread

ICP generates:
A G308 with the parameters contour name and milling depth (–
1*BT).
A G300 with the parameters of the hole.
A G309.
Linear pattern on face

ID Contour name
PT Milling depth
Parameters of pattern
XK, YK 1st point of pattern (Cartesian coordinates)
QP Number of points in pattern
IP, JP End point of pattern (Cartesian coordinates)
IPi, JPi Distance between two pattern points (in XK, YK
direction)
AP Position angle
RP Total length of pattern
RPi Distance between two pattern points
Parameters of the selected figure/hole
ICP generates:
1*BT).
A G401 with the parameters of the pattern.
The G function and the parameters of the figure/hole.
A G309.
372 ICP Programming

Circular pattern on face

ID Contour name
PT Milling depth
XK, YK Center of pattern (Cartesian coordinates)
DR Direction of rotation (default: 0)
DR=0, without EP: Figures are arranged on a full circle
DR=0, with EP: Figures are arranged on the longer
circular arc
DR=0, with EPi: The algebraic sign of EPi defines the
direction (EPi<0: clockwise)
DR=1, with EP: clockwise
DR=1, with EPi: clockwise (algebraic sign of EPi has
no effect)
DR=2, with EP: counterclockwise
DR=2, with EPi: counterclockwise (algebraic sign of
EPi has no effect)
DP Pattern diameter
AP Starting angle (default: 0°)
EP End angle (no entry: the pattern elements are equally
divided into 360°)
EPi Angle between two figures
H Element position
0: Normal – the figures are rotated about the circle
center (rotation)
1: Original position – the position of the figures relative
to the coordinate system remains unchanged
(translation)
ICP generates:
1*BT).
A G309.

5.13 Lateral Surface Contours in smart.Turn
5.13 Lateral Surface Contours in
smart.Turn
In smart.Turn, ICP provides the following contours for machining with
the C axis:
Complex contours defined with individual contour elements
Figures
Holes
Pattern of figures or holes
Reference data of lateral surface

contour elements: See “Contour Elements on Lateral Surface” on
page 358.
Parameters of milling operations
ID Contour name
PT Milling depth
XR Reference diameter
You can find the reference diameter XR with the "select reference
plane" function (see page 364). The reference diameter is used for
converting angle dimensions into linear dimensions.
ICP generates:
The SURFACE section code with the reference dimension
parameter. In nested contours, ICP generates only one section
code.
A G309 at the end of the contour description or after the figure.
374 ICP Programming

Circle on lateral surface

ID Contour name
PT Milling depth
Z Figure center
CYM Center of figure as linear dimension (reference: diameter XR)
CM Center of figure (angle)
R Radius
ICP generates:
code.
A G309.

Rectangle on lateral surface

ID Contour name
PT Milling depth
Z Figure center
A Position angle
K Length
B Width
BR Rounding arc
ICP generates:
code.
A G309.
376 ICP Programming

Polygon on lateral surface

ID Contour name
PT Milling depth
Z Figure center
A Position angle
Q Number of corners
K Length of edge
BR Rounding arc
ICP generates:
code.
A G309.

Linear slot on lateral surface

ID Contour name
PT Milling depth
Z Figure center
A Position angle
K Length
B Width
ICP generates:
code.
A G309.
378 ICP Programming

Circular slot on lateral surface

ID Contour name
PT Milling depth
Z Figure center
A Starting angle
W End angle
R Radius
CW
CCW
B Width
ICP generates:
code.
A G309.

Hole on lateral surface
This function defines a single hole that can contain the following
elements:
Centering
Core hole
Countersink
Thread
ID Contour name
Z Center of hole
Centering
O Diameter
Hole
B Diameter
BT Depth
W Angle
Countersink
R Diameter
U Depth
E Sinking angle
Thread
GD Diameter
GT Depth
K Run-out length
F Thread pitch
1: Left-hand thread
ICP generates:
code.
1*BT).
A G309.
380 ICP Programming

Linear pattern on lateral surface

ID Contour name
PT Milling depth
Z 1st point of pattern
CY 1st pattern point as linear dimension (reference: diameter XR)
C 1st point of pattern (angle)
ZE End point of pattern
ZEi Distance between two pattern points (in Z direction)
WP End point of pattern (angle)
WPi Distance between two pattern points (angle)
AP Position angle
ICP generates:
code.
1*BT).
A G309.

Circular pattern on lateral surface
Reference data: (see “Reference data of lateral surface” on page 374)
ID Contour name
PT Milling depth
Z Center of pattern
CY Center of pattern as linear dimension (reference: diameter XR)
C Center of pattern (angle)
DR=0, with EP: Figures are arranged on the longer circular
arc
DR=1, with EPi: clockwise (algebraic sign of Wi has no
effect)
DR=2, with EP: Counterclockwise
DR=2, with EPi: counterclockwise (algebraic sign of EPi has
no effect)
DP Pattern diameter
EP End angle (no entry: the pattern elements are equally divided
into 360°)
H Element position
0: Normal – the figures are rotated about the circle center
(rotation)
1: Original position – the position of the figures relative to
the coordinate system remains unchanged (translation)
ICP generates:
code.
1*BT).
A G309.
382 ICP Programming

5.14 Contours in the XY plane
In smart.Turn, ICP provides the following contours for machining with Soft keys for polar coordinates
the Y axis:
Complex contours defined with individual contour elements angle W.
Figures
Holes Switches the field to entering the
Pattern of figures or holes radius P.
Single surface
Polygon
Enter the dimensions of the XY plane contour elements in Cartesian
or polar values. You can switch between them by pressing a soft key
to define a point.
Reference data in XY plane

contour elements.
Reference data of milling operations
ID Contour name
PT Milling depth
C Spindle angle
IR Limit diameter
You can find the reference dimension ZR and the limit diameter IR
with the "select reference plane" function (see page 364).
ICP generates:
The section code FRONT_Y with the parameters reference
dimension, spindle angle, and limit diameter. The section code is
omitted for nested contours.

Starting point of contour in XY plane
Parameters
XS, YS Starting point of contour
Vertical lines in XY plane
element.
Parameters
Y Target point
Yi Incremental target point (distance from starting point to
target point)
L Length of line
384 ICP Programming

Horizontal lines in XY plane
element.
Parameters
X Target point
Xi Incremental target point (distance from starting point to
target point)
L Length of line

Line at angle in XY plane
element.
Parameters
X, Y Target point
Xi, Yi Incremental target point (distance from starting point to
target point)
AN Angle to X axis (for direction of angle, see help graphic)
L Length of line
386 ICP Programming

Circular arc in XY plane
Parameters
X, Y Target point (end point of the circular arc)
Xi, Yi Incremental target point (distance from starting point to
target point)
to target point)
starting point)
I, J Center of arc
Ii, Ji: Incremental center of arc (distance from starting point to
center in X, Z)
center)
point)
R Radius

Chamfer/rounding arc in XY plane
Select a chamfer.
Parameters
AN Element position
388 ICP Programming

Circle in XY plane

ID Contour name
PT Milling depth
C Spindle angle
IR Limit diameter
XM, YM Figure center
R Radius
ICP generates:
The section code FRONT_Y with the parameters limit diameter,
reference dimension and spindle angle. The section code is omitted
for nested contours.
A G309.

Rectangle in XY plane

ID Contour name
PT Milling depth
C Spindle angle
IR Limit diameter
A Position angle (reference: X axis)
K Length
B Width
BR Rounding arc
ICP generates:
A G309.
390 ICP Programming

Polygon in XY plane

ID Contour name
PT Milling depth
C Spindle angle
IR Limit diameter
Q Number of corners
K Length of edge
BR Rounding arc
ICP generates:
A G309.

Linear slot in XY plane

ID Contour name
PT Milling depth
C Spindle angle
IR Limit diameter
K Length
B Width
ICP generates:
A G309.
392 ICP Programming

Circular slot in XY plane

ID Contour name
PT Milling depth
C Spindle angle
IR Limit diameter
A Starting angle (reference: X axis)
W End angle (reference: X axis)
slot)
CW
CCW
B Width
ICP generates:
A G309.

Hole in XY plane
This hole defines a single hole that can contain the following elements:
Centering
Core hole
Countersink
Thread
ID Contour name
C Spindle angle
IR Limit diameter
XM, YM Center of hole
Centering
O Diameter
Hole
B Diameter
BT Depth
W Angle
Countersink
R Diameter
U Depth
E Sinking angle
Thread
GD Diameter
GT Depth
K Run-out length
F Thread pitch
1: Left-hand thread
ICP generates:
The section code FRONT_Y with the parameters reference
dimension, spindle angle, and limit diameter. The section code is
omitted for nested contours.
A G308 with the parameters contour name and milling depth
(–1*BT).
A G309.
394 ICP Programming

Linear pattern in XY plane

ID Contour name
PT Milling depth
C Spindle angle
IR Limit diameter
X, Y 1st point of pattern
IP, JP End point of pattern (Cartesian coordinates)
IPi, JPi Distance between two pattern points (in X or Y direction)
AP Position angle
ICP generates:
(–1*BT).
A G309.

Circular pattern in XY plane
Reference data: (see “Reference data in XY plane” on page 383)
ID Contour name
PT Milling depth
C Spindle angle
IR Limit diameter
X, Y Center of pattern
circular arc
no effect)
DR=2, with EP: counterclockwise
EPi has no effect)
DP Pattern diameter
divided into 360°)
H Element position
center (rotation)
(translation)
ICP generates:
(–1*BT).
A G309.
396 ICP Programming

Single surface in XY plane
This function defines a surface in the XY plane.
Reference data of the single hole
ID Contour name
C Spindle angle (position angle of the surface normal)
IR Limit diameter
Parameters of the single surface
Z Reference edge
Ki Depth
K Residual depth
B Width (reference: reference dimension ZR)
B<0: Surface in negative Z direction
B>0: Surface in positive Z direction
You can switch between depth (Ki) and residual depth (K) by pressing
a soft key (see table at right).
ICP generates:
A G308 with the parameter contour name.
A G376 with the parameters of the single surface.
A G309.
Soft key
residual depth K.

Centric polygon in XY plane
This function defines polygonal surfaces in the XY plane.
Reference data of the polygon
ID Contour name
IR Limit diameter
Parameters of the polygon
Z Reference edge
Q Number of sides (Q>=2)
K Width across flats
Ki Length of side
You can switch between edge length (Ki) and width across flats (K) by
pressing a soft key (see table at right).
ICP generates:
A G477 with the parameters of the polygon.
A G309. Soft key
width across flats K.
398 ICP Programming

5.15 Contours in the YZ Plane
In smart.Turn, ICP provides the following contours for machining with Soft keys for polar coordinates
the Y axis:
Complex contours defined with individual contour elements angle W.
Figures
Holes Switches the field to entering the
Pattern of figures or holes radius P.
Single surface
Polygon
Enter the dimensions of the YZ plane contour elements in Cartesian or
polar values. You can switch between them by pressing a soft key
to define a point.
Reference data in YZ plane

contour elements.
Reference data of milling operations
ID Contour name
PT Milling depth
C Spindle angle
ICP generates:
The section code SURFACE_Y with the reference diameter and
spindle angle. The section code is omitted for nested contours.

Starting point of contour in YZ plane
Parameters
YS, ZS Starting point of contour
Vertical lines in YZ plane
element.
Parameters
Y Target point
Yi Incremental target point (distance from starting point to
target point)
L Length of line
400 ICP Programming

Horizontal lines in YZ plane
element.
Parameters
Z Target point
Zi Incremental target point (distance from starting point to
target point)
L Length of line

Line at angle in YZ plane
element.
Parameters
Y, Z Target point
Yi, Zi Incremental target point (distance from starting point to
target point)
AN Angle to Z axis (for direction of angle, see help graphic)
L Length of line
402 ICP Programming

Circular arc in YZ plane
Parameters
Y, Z Target point (end point of the circular arc)
Yi, Zi Incremental target point (distance from starting point to
target point)
to target point)
starting point)
J, K Center of arc
Ji, Ki Incremental center of arc (distance from starting point to
center in X, Z)
center)
point)
R Radius

Chamfer/rounding arc in YZ plane
Select a chamfer.
Parameters
AN Element position
404 ICP Programming

Circle in YZ plane

ID Contour name
PT Milling depth
C Spindle angle
YM, ZM Figure center
R Radius
ICP generates:
A G309.

Rectangle in YZ plane

ID Contour name
PT Milling depth
C Spindle angle
K Length
B Width
BR Rounding arc
ICP generates:
A G309.
406 ICP Programming

Polygon in YZ plane

ID Contour name
PT Milling depth
C Spindle angle
Q Number of corners
K Length of edge
BR Rounding arc
ICP generates:
A G309.

Linear slot in YZ plane

ID Contour name
PT Milling depth
C Spindle angle
K Length
B Width
ICP generates:
A G309.
Circular slot in YZ plane

ID Contour name
PT Milling depth
C Spindle angle
A Starting angle (reference: X axis)
W End angle (reference: X axis)
slot)
CW
CCW
B Width
ICP generates:
A G309.
408 ICP Programming

Hole in YZ plane
This hole defines a single hole that can contain the following elements:
Centering
Core hole
Countersink
Thread
ID Contour name
C Spindle angle
YM, ZM Center of hole
Centering
O Diameter
Hole
B Diameter
BT Depth
W Angle
Countersink
R Diameter
U Depth
E Sinking angle
Thread
GD Diameter
GT Depth
K Run-out length
F Thread pitch
1: Left-hand thread
ICP generates:
(–1*BT).
A G309.

Linear pattern in YZ plane

ID Contour name
PT Milling depth
C Spindle angle
Y, Z 1st point of pattern
JP, KP End point of pattern (Cartesian coordinates)
JPi, KPi Distance between two pattern points (in Y or Z direction)
AP Position angle
ICP generates:
(–1*BT).
A G309.
410 ICP Programming

Circular pattern in YZ plane

ID Contour name
PT Milling depth
C Spindle angle
Y, Z Center of pattern
circular arc
no effect)
DR=2, with EP: Counterclockwise
EPi has no effect)
DP Pattern diameter
divided into 360°)
H Element position
center (rotation)
(translation)
ICP generates:
(–1*BT).
A G309.

Single surface in YZ plane
This function defines a surface in the YZ plane.
Reference data of the single hole
ID Contour name
Parameters of the single surface
Z Reference edge
Ki Depth
K Residual depth
You can switch between depth (Ki) and residual depth (K) by pressing
a soft key (see table at right).
ICP generates:
A G386 with the parameters of the single surface.
A G309.
Soft key
residual depth K.
412 ICP Programming

Centric polygons in YZ plane
This function defines centric polygons in the YZ plane.
Reference data of the polygon
ID Contour name
Parameters of the polygon
Z Reference edge
Q Number of sides (Q>=2)
K Width across flats
Ki Length of side
You can switch between edge length (Ki) and width across flats (K) by
pressing a soft key (see table at right).
ICP generates:
A G487 with the parameters of the polygon.
A G309.
Soft key
width across flats K.

5.16 Loading Existing Contours
Integrating cycle contours in smart.Turn
ICP contours that you have created for cycle programs can be Extension Group
loaded in smart.Turn. ICP converts the contours into G commands and
integrates them in the smart.Turn program. The contour is now part of *.gmi Turning contours
the smart.Turn program.
*.gmr Contours of workpiece blanks
The ICP editor considers the type of contour. For example, you can
load a contour defined for the face only if you have selected the face *.gms Milling contours on face
(C axis) in smart.Turn.
*.gmm Milling contours on lateral surface
ICP activate the editor.

Press the Next file type soft key until the cycle
contours are displayed (see file extension table at
right).
Select the file.
Load the selected file.
Blank or finished part contour: Supplement or adapt the

contour, if necessary.
C-axis contour: Complete the reference data.
414 ICP Programming

DXF contours (option)
Contours that exist in DXF format are imported with the ICP editor.
You can use DXF contours both for cycle operation and for smart.Turn.
Requirements of a DXF contour:
Only two-dimensional elements
The contour must be in a separate layer (without dimension lines,
without wraparound edges, etc.).
Depending on the setup of the lathe, contours for turning operations
must be either in front of or behind the workpiece.
No complete circles, no splines, no DXF blocks (macros), etc.
Contour preparation during the DXF format: Since the DXF format
is fundamentally different from the ICP format, the contour is
converted from DXF to ICP format during the import. The process
makes the following changes:
Polylines are transformed into linear elements:
Gaps between contour elements that are < 0.01 mm are closed.
Open contours are described "from right to left" (starting point:
right).
The starting point on closed contours is specified according to
internal rules.
The rotational direction for closed contours is counterclockwise.

Activate the ICP editor.

Press the Next file type soft key until the DXF
contours are displayed (see file extension "*.DXF").
Select the file.
Open the selected file.
Select the DXF layer.
Load the selected contour.
Blank or finished part contour: Supplement or adapt the

contour, if necessary.
C-axis or Y-axis contour: Complete the reference data.
416 ICP Programming

Graphic Simulation
6.1 Simulation Mode of Operation
Press this soft key to start a graphic simulation from the
following operating modes:
smart.Turn
Program Run
Teach-in
Manual Operation (cycles)
When called from the smart.Turn mode, the graphic simulation opens
the large simulation window and loads the selected program. When
you call the simulation from the Machine modes of operation, either
the small simulation window or the last window you used is opened.
Large simulation window
Menu line for controlling the simulation through the numeric
keypad
Simulation window: Displays the workpieces and the tool
movements. The simulation supports the simultaneous display or
multiple views in the simulation window. In the "window selection,"
select the following views:
XZ view (turning view)
XC view (face view)
ZC view (lateral surface)
YZ view (for operations with the Y axis)
Displays:
NC program blocks
NC block number, position values and tool information
Name of the NC program
Small simulation window:
The machine display fields and the cycle dialog are not hidden and
remain visible during the simulation of cycle programs.
In the smart.Turn operating mode, the machine display is not
hidden.
You can set the following views by soft key:
XZ view (turning view)
XC view (face view)
ZC view (unrolled lateral surface)
In the Program Run, Teach-in and Manual modes of

operation, the simulation is started automatically for the
current program. In smart.Turn, the program is only
loaded. Press the soft key to start the simulation.
418 Graphic Simulation

Using the graphic simulation
The simulation is controlled by soft keys in all operating states. In
addition, you can always use the menu keys (numeric keys) to control
the simulation, even in the small simulation window, when the menu
bar is not visible.
Starting and stopping with soft keys

Starts the simulation from the beginning. The soft
key switches to the stop symbol; you can now use
the soft key to stop and resume the simulation,
depending on the simulation status.
Resumes a stopped simulation (Single Block mode).
The key indicates that a simulation is running at

present. Pressing the key stops the simulation.
Soft keys with active simulation window
Starting and stopping with menu keys For calling warnings. If the interpreter
issues warnings during simulation
Starts the simulation from the beginning.
(e.g. "Material remains unmachined"),
the soft key is activated and the
Resumes a stopped simulation (Single Block mode). number of warnings is shown. Each
time the soft key is pressed, it
The key indicates that a simulation is running at switches to the next warning.
present. Pressing the key stops the simulation.
In the "Continuous Run" mode, all
cycles of the program are simulated in
Large and small simulation window the program run mode without
stopping.
8 This menu item switches between the small and
large simulation window, even if the menu bar is not In the Single Block mode, the
visible. simulation stops after each movement
With the other menu items and the soft keys listed in the table, you (basic block).
define the sequence of the simulation, activate the magnify function,
Opens the soft-key menu for the zoom
or use the miscellaneous functions to make settings for the
functions and displays the zoom frame
simulation.
(see "Adjusting the visible section" on
page 426).
You can operate the simulation with the numeric keys
even if the menu bar is not visible. Switches the menu and the soft-key
In the Machine modes of operation, use the numeric row over to the miscellaneous
key [5] to switch between the small and large simulation functions.
windows.
In the Machine modes of operation, an activation of the

Single Block soft key is also effective in automatic
mode.
In the Machine modes of operation, you can start
automatic program run directly from the simulation by
pressing Cycle on.

The miscellaneous functions
You use the miscellaneous functions to select the simulation
window, to determine how the tool path is depicted, or to call the time
calculation.
The tables provide you with an overview of the menu and soft-key
functions.
Overview of the "miscellaneous functions" menu
Selects the simulation window (see "Simulation
Window" on page 421).
Activates a startup-block search (see "Simulation
with Mid-program Startup" on page 428).
Selects 3-D view (see "Simulation with Mid-program
Startup" on page 428).
Calls the time calculation (see "Time Calculation" on
page 430). Soft keys for the miscellaneous functions
Switches between the large and the small simulation Switches between wire-frame
window (see "Using the graphic simulation" on graphics and cutting-path graphics.
page 419).
Switches between the single and multiple window Switches between light-dot and
display (see "Multiple window view" on page 422). cutting-edge view.
Activates the 2-D material-removal

graphic
Selects the view.
Switches the focus to the next

window.

6.2 Simulation Window
Setting up the views
With the simulation windows described in the following you check not
only the turning work but also the drilling and milling operations.
XZ view (turning view): The turning contour is depicted in the XZ
coordinate system. The configured coordinate system is taken into
account (tool carrier in front of/behind the turning center, vertical
lathes).
XC view (face view): The displayed coordinate system is displayed
as a Cartesian system with the axis designations XK (horizontal) and
YK (vertical). The angle position C=0° is on the XK axis, the positive
direction of rotation is counterclockwise.
ZC view (lateral surface view): The contour display and traverse-
path display are oriented to the position on the unrolled lateral
surface and the Z coordinates. The upper and lower lines of this
workpiece correspond to the angular positions C=–180°/+180°,
respectively. All drilling and milling operations are within the range –
180° to +180°.
Cycle program or DIN program with workpiece blank
definition: The basis for the unrolled workpiece surface is the
dimensions of the programmed workpiece.
Cycle program or DIN program without workpiece blank
definition: The basis for the unrolled workpiece surface is the
dimensions of the "standard blank" (user parameter: "simulation >
definition of the standard workpiece blank size").
Single cycle or Teach-In: The basis of the unrolled workpiece
surface is the section defined by the respective cycle (expansion
in Z and limiting diameter X).
YZ view (side view): The contour and traverse path are shown in
the YZ plane. The side view depicts only the Y and Z coordinates—
not the spindle position.
Front face and surface windows operate with a fixed

spindle position. Whereas the machine turns the
workpiece, the graphic simulation moves the tool.
Single-window view
Single-window view Soft key for selecting the view
Only one view is shown in the small simulation window. You switch Select the view:
the view with the Main view soft key. You can also use this soft key
when only one view is set in the large simulation window. Turning view XZ
Face view XC
With cycle programs, you can activate the face or lateral surface view
only when the C axis is used in the program. Lateral surface view ZC

Multiple window view
Activating the multiple window view (possible only in the large
simulation window):
8 Switch the menu bar to "Miscellaneous functions."
8 Select the "Window" menu item (in the large

simulation window).
8 Set the desired window combination.
8 Set the path display in the auxiliary windows.
The path display in the supplementary windows: The front face
window, surface window, and YZ view are considered supplementary
windows. The following setting specifies whether the simulation
depicts traverse paths in the windows.
Automatic: The simulation displays traverse paths if the C axis has
been oriented or a G17 or G19 has been executed. G18 or a C axis
out of orientation stops output of the traverse paths.
Always: The simulation shows the traverse path in all simulation
windows.
In the multiple window view, a window is indicated with a green
frame. This window has the "focus," which means that magnification
settings and other functions apply to this window.
Switching the focus
8 Press the soft key (or the GOTO key) several times
until the focus is on the desired window.
Switching between the single and multiple window display:

8Select the menu item (or the decimal point key) to
switch from the multiple-window to single-window
view. The window with the green frame is shown as
a single window view.
8Pressing the menu item again (or the decimal key)
switches back to the multiple window view.

6.3 Views
6.3 Views
Traverse path display
Rapid traverse paths are shown as a broken white line.
Feed paths are displayed either as a line or as a cutting trace,
depending on the soft-key setting:
Line display: A solid line describes the path of the theoretical tool
tip (wire-frame graphics) The wire frame display is particularly
convenient if you only need a quick overview of the proportioning of
cuts. The path of the theoretical tool tip, however, is not identical
with the contour of the workpiece. This view is therefore not as
suitable if you wish to run a thorough check of the machined
contour. In the CNC, this “falsification” is compensated by the
cutting radius compensation.
Cutting path display: The simulation uses hatch marking to depict
the surface covered by the cutting area of the tool. The cutting path
graphic accounts for the exact geometry of the tool tip (cutting
radius, cutting width, tool-tip position, etc.). You can check in the
simulation whether the contour is machined completely or needs to
be reworked, whether the contour is damaged by the tool or
overlaps are too large. The cutting path graphics is especially useful
for recessing or drilling operations as well as for machining slopes
where the tool shape has an essential influence on the accuracy of
the resulting workpiece.
Activate the cutting path graphics:
8 With the soft key activated, the cutting paths of
traverse are shown.
The "Simulation/General settings/Traverse delay" user

parameters are used to influence the simulation speed.
Tool depiction
You adjust by soft key whether the tool cutting edge or the light dot is Soft keys for miscellaneous functions
shown (see table at right).
Switches between wire-frame
The tool cutting edge is shown with the correct angles and cutting graphics and cutting-path graphics.
radius, as defined in the tool database.
Light-dot view: A white square (light dot) is shown at the currently Switches between light-dot and
programmed position. The light dot represents the position of the cutting-edge view.
imaginary cutting edge.

6.3 Views
Material-removal graphic
The material-removal graphics shows the workpiece blank as a "filled Soft keys for miscellaneous functions
surface." When the tool tip passes through the workpiece blank, the
workpiece area covered by the tool is erased in the graphic. Activates the 2-D material-removal
graphic
The material-removal graphic mode shows all paths of traverse
according to the programmed speed. The 2-D material-removal
graphic mode is only available in side view (XZ). You activate this type Menu for the material-removal graphic
of simulation by soft key (see table at right).
Slows the material-removal
You can change the speed of simulation in the metal- graphic.
removal graphic by using the keys in the table at right.
Material removal graphic at the
programmed feed rate
Accelerates the material-removal

graphic.

6.3 Views
3-D View
8 The "3-D View" menu item switches to a perspective Soft keys for miscellaneous functions
view.
Displays a transparent
With the 3-D view, you can display the workpiece, auxiliary contour workpiece.
and finished part in a solid-model view If there are two or more
auxiliary contours in the program, they are displayed by pressing the
Displays the workpiece.
"auxiliary contour" soft key repeatedly. The "workpiece" display shows
the defined workpiece blank or the workpiece after respective stages
of machining.
Displays the finished part.
With the menu functions you can rotate the graphic around the
principal axes X, Y and Z. The "perspective view" soft key resets the
graphic to its initial condition. Displays an auxiliary contour.
The workpiece, auxiliary contour, and finished-part soft
keys are displayed regardless of the content of the
program. Displays a section view.
View from in front of the

workpiece
Selects perspective view.
Menu assignment for 3-D view

Rotate graphics in positive direction
around the X axis.

around the Y axis.

around the Z axis.
Rotate graphics in negative direction

around the X axis.

around the Y axis.

around the Z axis.

6.4 The Zoom Function
Adjusting the visible section
Press this soft key to activate the zoom function. With the
zoom menu, you can modify the section displayed in the
simulation window. As an alternative to the soft keys, you
can use the cursor keys and the PG DN and PG UP keys to change
the visible section.
For cycle programs, and when a program is simulated for the first
time, CNC PILOT automatically selects the displayed section. When
you simulate the same smart.Turn program again, the last selected
section is used.
In the multiple window view, the zoom function applies to the window
with a green frame.
Modifying the section by using keys
You can use the following keys to change the visible section without
opening the zoom function:
Keys for modifying the displayed section
Soft keys in the zoom menu
The arrow keys move the workpiece in the
indicated direction. Deletes all traverse paths drawn so
far.
The workpiece blank regeneration is
active, the workpiece blank is
updated and redrawn.
Reduces the displayed workpiece (zoom –). Closes the zoom menu.
Extends the displayed section directly

Magnifies the displayed workpiece (zoom +). (zoom –).
Switches back to the standard screen

section and closes the zoom menu.
Switches to the last section selected.
Applies the area selected by the red

frame as the new section and closes
the zoom menu.
Closes the zoom menu without

changing the selected section.

Modifying the section with the zoom menu
When you activate the zoom menu, a red frame is shown in the
simulation window. This red frame indicates the zoom area, which
you can select using the Take over soft key or the Enter key. Use
the following keys to change the frame size and position:
Keys for modifying the red frame
The arrow keys move the red frame in the indicated
direction.
Reduces the size of the red frame.
Increases the size of the red frame.

6.5 Simulation with Mid-program Startup
6.5 Simulation with Mid-program
Startup
Mid-program startup with DIN PLUS programs
DIN PLUS programs are always simulated from the first block,
regardless of which block the cursor is in. If you use the mid-program
startup, the simulation suppresses the display up to the startup block.
If there is a workpiece blank, the simulation scans the blocks up to this
position, updates the blank and redraws it.
The simulation then draws the traverse paths starting from the startup
block.
Activating a mid-program startup:
8 Select the "Start block" menu item.
8 Enter the number of the startup block and confirm.
8 Go back to the main menu of the simulation.
8 Start the simulation. The CNC PILOT scans the NC

program up to the startup block, regenerates the
blank and stops at this position.
8 Continue the simulation.
The block number for startup is shown in the lowest line of the display.
The field for the startup block and the block number in the display have
a yellow background as long as the simulation is conducting the mid-
program startup.
Mid-program startup remains on even if you cancel the simulation. If
you restart the simulation after cancelation, it stops at the section
code MACHINING. This enables you to change settings before
continuing the simulation.
Soft keys for mid-program startup
Loads the NC block number in the
display as the startup block.
Switches off the mid-program startup.
Load the defined starting block and

activate the mid-program startup.
Cancels the mid-program startup.

6.5 Simulation with Mid-program Startup
Mid-program startup in cycle programs
For cycle programs, you first place the cursor on a cycle and then call
the simulation. The simulation begins with this cycle. All previous
cycles are ignored.
The Start block menu item is deactivated for cycle programs.

6.6 Time Calculation
6.6 Time Calculation
Showing the machining times
During simulation, the machining and idle-machine times are
calculated. The machining times, idle times and total times are shown
in the "Time calculation" table (green: machining times; yellow: idle
times). If you are working with cycle programs, each cycle is shown in
a separate line. In DIN programs, each line represents the use of a
new tool (for each tool call with T).
If there are more table entries than fit on a screen page, you can call
further time data with the cursor keys and PG UP/PG DN.
Calling the machining times:
8 Call the time calculation.

Tool and Technology
Database

7.1 Tool Database
7.1 Tool Database
You usually program the coordinates for the contour by taking the
dimensions from the drawing. To enable CNC PILOT to calculate the
slide path, compensate the cutting radius and determine the number
of cutting passes, you need to enter the tool length, cutting radius, tool
angle, etc.
The CNC PILOT can save tool data for up to 250 tools (optionally 999),
whereby each tool is identified with a number (ID code). For each tool,
you can enter an additional tool description which makes it easier to
find the tool data again when needed.
The Machine mode has functions for determining the tool length
dimensions (see "Tool Measurement" on page 83).
Wear compensation is managed separately. This allows you to enter
new compensation values at any time, even during program run.
You can also assign a cutting material to the tools, which gives you
direct access to the terminology database (feed rate, cutting speed).
This saves you a lot of time since you only need to determine and
enter the cutting data once.
Tool types
Tools for drilling, recessing, finishing, etc., have very different shapes.
Therefore, the reference points for determining the tool length and
other tool data also vary.
The following table provides an overview of the tool types.
Tool types Tool types

Standard turning tools (Page 443) NC center drills (Page 447)
Roughing tools
Finishing tools
Button tools (Page 443) Centering tools (Page 448)
Recessing tools (Page 444) Counterbores (Page 449)

Recessing tools
Parting tools Countersinks (Page 450)
Recess-turning tools
Thread-cutting tools (Page 445) Standard milling tools (Page 452)
Twist drills (Page 446) Thread mills (Page 453)
Indexable-insert drills (Page 446) Angle cutter (Page 454)
432 Tool and Technology Database

7.1 Tool Database
Tool types Tool types
Taps (Page 451) Milling pins (Page 455)
Length gauges (Page 456)
Multipoint tools
A multipoint tool is a tool with multiple cutting edges or multiple
reference points. A data record is created for every cutting edge or
every reference mark. Then all data records of the multipoint tool are
linked together.
For every data record of a multipoint tool, the position within the
multipoint tool chain is shown in the tool list in the column "MU."
Counting begins with byte “0.”
The figure at right shows a tool with two reference points.
Tool life management

The control can "count" either the machining time of a tool (i.e. the time
a tool is traversed at the programmed feed rate) or the number of parts
that were produced with that tool. These two options are used for tool
life management.
As soon as the tool life expires or the programmed quantity is reached,
the system interrupts machining and asks you to replace the tool or
cutting edge. The machining operation, however, is not interrupted
until the workpiece that is currently being produced is finished.

7.2 Tool Editor
7.2 Tool Editor
Tool list
In the tool list, the CNC PILOT displays important parameters and the
tool descriptions. You can recognize the tool type and the tool
orientation from the provided sketch of the tool point.
Sorting the tool list
8 The tool list switches between sorting by ID number
and by tool type (and orientation)“.
8 The tool list switches between ascending and
descending sorting.
Displaying the entries of only one tool type.

8 Press the soft key and select the tool type in the
following soft-key rows.
8 The CNC PILOT creates a list containing only tools of the selected
type. Soft keys for tool organization
You can navigate within the tool list with the arrow keys and PG UP/PG Open the soft-key menu to select the
DN to check the entries. tool type.
Sorts the tool list as desired by tool type

or ID number.
Switches between ascending and

descending sorting.

7.2 Tool Editor
Editing the tool data
Adding a new tool Soft keys for tool organization
8 Press the soft key. Opens the following type selection for
adding a new tool.
8 Select the tool type (see soft-key table at right).

8 The CNC PILOT opens the input window.
8 First assign the ID number (1 to 16 places, alphanumeric) and Special tools:
specify the tool orientation.
8 Enter further parameters.
8 Assign a tool text (see Page 436).
Type selection for special drilling tools:
The CNC PILOT does not show the help graphics for
individual parameters until the tool orientation is known.
Creating new tools by copying

Type selection for special milling tools:
8 Place the cursor on the desired entry.
8 Press the soft key. The CNC PILOT opens the input
window with the tool data.
8 Enter a new ID number. Check and edit the other tool data.
Type selection for touch probes:
8 Press the soft key. The new tool is added to the
database.
Editing the tool data

8 Place the cursor on the desired entry. Opens the dialog box for the selected
8 Press the soft key. The tool parameters are provided
tool.
for editing.
Copies the selected tool and creates a
new tool with the copied data.
Deleting an entry
8 Place the cursor on the entry to be deleted. Deletes the selected tool after you
8 Press the soft key and answer the security prompt
confirm a dialog prompt from the
with Yes. database.
Opens the technology editor (see

Page 457).

7.2 Tool Editor
Tool texts
Tool texts are assigned to the tools and displayed in the tool list. The
CNC PILOT manages the tool texts in a separate list.
Connections:
The descriptions are managed in the tool text list. Each entry is
preceded by a "QT number."
The parameter "Tool text QT" contains the reference number for the
"tool text" list. The text indicated by QT is then displayed in the tool
list.
When the tool dialog box is open, CNC PILOT lets you enter tool texts.
Press the Tool texts soft key.
You can define up to 999 tool texts of max. 80 characters length.
New texts are inserted in the next free line after the
cursor position.
When deleting and editing a tool text, please remember Soft keys in tool list
that the text might be used for more than one tool.
Generates a new line in the text list
and opens it for text input.
Opens the selected tool text for

editing. Press ENTER to confirm.
Copies the currently selected tool text

to a new text line. This creates a new
tool text.
Transfers the text number to the tool

dialog box as a reference and exits the
tool text editor.
Deletes the selected tool text after a

confirmation prompt.
Closes the tool text editor and returns

to the tool dialog box without applying
any changes to the text references.

7.2 Tool Editor
Editing multipoint tools
Creating multipoint tools
For each cutting edge, or each reference point, make a separate data
record with the tool description.
Place the cursor on a first cutting edge.

Press the soft key.
Press the soft key. The tool editor considers this

cutting edge to be the main cutting edge (MU=0).
Place the cursor on a next cutting edge.

Press the soft key. The tool editor adds this cutting
edge to the multipoint tool chain.
Repeat these steps for any further cutting edges of the multipoint tool.
Press the soft key.
Removing a cutting edge from the multipoint tool
Place the cursor on a cutting edge of the multipoint tool.

Press the soft key.
Press the soft key. The tool editor lists all cutting
edges of the multipoint tool.
Select the cutting edge.
Remove the cutting edge from the multipoint tool

chain.

7.2 Tool Editor
Removing complete multipoint tools
Place the cursor on a cutting edge of the multipoint tool.

Press the soft key.
Press the soft key. The tool editor lists all cutting
edges of the multipoint tool.
Place the cursor on a cutting edge no. 0 of the

multipoint tool.
The multipoint tool chain is removed.

7.2 Tool Editor
Editing tool-life data
The CNC PILOT counts the tool age in RT and the quantity of finished
parts in RZ. When the predefined tool age or the part quantity limit has
been reached, the tool is considered to be worn out.
Setting a limit to tool life
Set the soft key to "Tool life." The tool editor opens
the Tool life MT input field for editing.
Enter the tool life in the "h:mm:ss" format (h=hours; m=minutes;

s=seconds). You can use the cursor keys to switch between hours,
minutes and seconds.
Enter the max. quantity.
Set the soft key to "No. of pieces." The tool editor

opens the No. of pieces MZ input field for editing.
Enter the limit quantity, i.e. the number of workpieces that can be
machined with one cutting edge.
New cutting edge
Insert a new cutting edge.
Call the corresponding data record in the tool editor.
Press the soft key. The tool life/limit quantity is reset

to zero.
Tool life monitoring is activated/deactivated in the Tool

life monitoring user parameter Page 467.
The quantity is added when the end of the program has
been reached.
Tool life / quantity monitoring is also continued after a
change of program.

7.3 Tool Data
7.3 Tool Data
General tool parameters
The parameters listed in the following table are available for all tool
types. Parameters for specific tool types are described in the later
chapters.
General tool parameters
ID ID number - Name of the tool (up to 16 characters)
TO Tool orientation (for identification number, see graphics)
XL Tool setting dimension in X
ZL Tool setting dimension in Z
DX Wear compensation in X (Range: –100 mm < DX < 100 mm)
DZ Wear compensation in Z (Range: –100 mm < DZ < 100 mm)
DS Special compensation (Range: –100 mm < DZ < 100 mm)
MD Direction of rotation (default: Not defined)
3: M3
4: M4
QT (Reference to) tool text
SS Cutting material (name of the cutting material for access to the
technology database)
CK G96 compensation factor (default: 1)
FK G95 compensation factor (default: 1)
DK Depth compensation factor (default: 1)
PLC Additional information (see machine manual)
MT Tool life. Preset value for tool life monitoring (default: not
defined)
MZ No. of pieces. Preset value for tool life monitoring (default: not
defined)
RT Display field for remaining tool life
RZ Display field for remaining no. of pieces
Parameters for drilling tools

AW Driven tool
0: Stationary tool
1: Driven tool
NL Usable length
RW Position angle

7.3 Tool Data
Description of the tool parameters
Identification number (ID): The CNC PILOT needs a unique name
for each tool. This "ID number" can have up to 16 alphanumeric
characters.
Tool orientation (TO): From the tool orientation, the CNC PILOT
determines the position of the tool tip and, depending on the
selected tool type, additional information such as the tool angle
direction, reference-point position, etc. This information is
necessary, for example, for calculating the cutting radius
compensation, plunge angle, etc.
The setting dimensions (XL, ZL) refer to the tool reference point.
The position of the reference point depends on the tool type (see
graphic support window).
Compensation values (DX, DZ, DS): compensate for the wear of
the cutting edge. For recessing and button tools, DS stands for the
compensation value of the third side of the tool, which is away from
the tool reference point. The cycles automatically shift to the special
compensation. With G148, you can also switch to special
compensation DS for single-path machining operations.
Direction of rotation (MD): If you define a direction of rotation, a
switching command (M3 or M4) is automatically generated for the
spindle or, with driven tools, for the auxiliary spindle in all cycles that
use this tool.
It depends on the PLC software of your machine whether

the generated switching commands are evaluated. If the
PLC does not execute the switching commands, they
should not be defined. Refer to your machine manual.
Tool text (QT): You can assign a tool text to each tool. The text is
shown in the tool list. Because the tool texts are shown in a
separate list, the reference to the text is entered in QT (see "Tool
texts" on page 436).
Cutting material (SS): This parameter is required if you want to use
the cutting data from the technology database (see "Technology
Database" on page 457).
Compensation factors (CK, FK, DK): These parameters serve for
the tool-specific adjustment of the cutting values. The cutting data
from the technology database are multiplied with the compensation
factors before they are entered as default values.
Additional information (PLC): You can find information on this
parameter in the machine manual. This date can be used for
machine-specific settings.
Tool life (MT, RT): If you use the tool life management, specify in
MT the tool life of the cutting edge. In RT the CNC PILOT shows the
tool life already passed.

Quantity (MT, RT): If you use the tool life management, specify in
7.3 Tool Data
MZ the number of workpieces that can be machined with one tool
cutting edge. In RZ the CNC PILOT shows the number of
workpieces that have already been machined with this cutting edge.
The tool life management and the quantity count are used
alternatively.
Parameters for drilling tools

Driven tool (AW) This parameter specifies for drilling and tapping
tools during cycle programming whether switching commands are
generated for the spindle or the driven tool.
Usable length (NL): Defines the length that the drill can penetrate.
Angle of orientation (RW): Defines the deviation from the main
machining direction in the mathematically positive direction of
rotation (–90° < rw < +90°).

7.3 Tool Data
Standard turning tools
Select "New tool."
Select lathe tools.
For tools with round cutting edge, switch to dialog for

button tools.
For tool orientations TO=1, 3, 5 and 7, you can enter the tool angle
EW. The tool orientation values TO=2, 4, 6, 8 are used for neutral
tools. "Neutral" tools are tools that are centered precisely in the tool
tip. One of the setting dimensions for neutral tools refers to the center
of the tool-tip radius.
Special parameters for roughing and finishing tools
RS Tool nose (cutting) radius
EW Tool angle (range: 0° <= EW <= 180°)
SW Point angle (range: 0° <= SW <= 180°)
For further tool parameters, see Page 440.
Special parameters for button tools
DS Special compensation (position of the special compensation:
see figure)
The wear compensation DX, DZ compensates for wear on

the two sides of the tool tip that lie next to the reference
point. The special compensation DS compensates for
wear on the third side of the tool tip.

7.3 Tool Data
Recessing tools
Select "New tool."
Select recessing tools.
Recessing tools are used for recessing, parting, recess turning and
finishing (only smart.Turn).
Special parameters for recessing tools
SW Point angle
SB Cutting width
SL Cutting length
DS Special compensation
The wear compensation DX, DZ compensates for wear on

the two sides of the tool tip that lie next to the reference
point. The special compensation DS compensates for
wear on the third side of the tool tip.

7.3 Tool Data
Thread-cutting tools
Select "New tool."
Select thread-cutting tools.
The help graphics illustrate the dimensions of the tools.

Special parameters for thread cutting tools
SB Cutting width
SW Point angle (range: 0° <= SW <= 180°)

7.3 Tool Data
Twist drills and indexable-insert drills
Select "New tool."
Select drilling tools.
For indexable-insert drills, switch to dialog for

indexable-insert drills.

Special parameters for twist drills
DV Hole diameter
BW Point angle (of twist drills)
For drilling operations with constant cutting speed, the

drilling diameter (DV) is used to calculate the spindle
speed.

7.3 Tool Data
NC center drill
Select "New tool."
Select special tools.
Select special drilling tools.
Select NC center drill.

Special parameters for NC center drills
DV Hole diameter
BW Point angle

speed.

7.3 Tool Data
Centering tool
Select "New tool."
Select centering tools.

Special parameters for centering tools
DV Hole diameter
DH Stud diameter
BW Drill angle
SW Point angle
ZA Stud length

speed.

7.3 Tool Data
Counterbore
Select "New tool."
Select counterbore.

Special parameters for counterbores
DV Hole diameter
DH Stud diameter
ZA Stud length

speed.

7.3 Tool Data
Countersink
Select "New tool."
Select counterbore.

Special parameters for countersinks
DV Hole diameter
DH Stud diameter
BW Drill angle

speed.

7.3 Tool Data
Tap
Select "New tool."
Select taps.

Special parameters for taps
DV Thread diameter
HG Thread pitch
AL Length of first cut
The thread pitch (HG) is evaluated if the corresponding

parameter is not defined in the tapping cycle.

7.3 Tool Data
Standard milling tools
Select "New tool."
Select milling tools.

Special parameters for standard milling tools
DV Milling cutter diameter
AZ Number of teeth
DD Cutter diameter compensation
For milling operations with constant cutting speed, the

milling cutter diameter (DV) is used to calculate the
spindle speed.
The number of teeth (AZ) parameter is evaluated for
G193 Feed per tooth.

7.3 Tool Data
Thread milling tools
Select "New tool."
Select special milling tools.
Select the thread milling tool.

Special parameters for thread milling tools
AZ Number of teeth
FB Cutter width
HG Pitch

spindle speed.

7.3 Tool Data
Angle cutters
Select "New tool."
Select angle cutters.

Special parameters for angle cutters
DV (Large) milling diameter
AZ Number of teeth
FB Cutter width
FB<0: Large cutter diameter on front
FB>0: Large cutter diameter on back
FW Cutter angle

spindle speed.

7.3 Tool Data
Milling pins
Select "New tool."
Select milling pins.

Special parameters for milling pins
AZ Number of teeth
SL Cutting length
FW Cutter angle

spindle speed.

7.3 Tool Data
Touch probes
Select "New tool."
Select handling systems and touch probes.
Select touch probes.

Special parameters for touch probes
SL Cutting length
TP Selection of touch probes
The CNC PILOT must be specially prepared by the

machine tool builder for the use of a 3-D touch probe.

7.4 Technology Database
The technology database manages the cutting data according to the
machining mode, the workpiece material and the cutting material. The
graphic on this page shows the composition of the database. Each
cube represents a data record with cutting data.
In its standard version, the technology database is designed for 9
workpiece-material/tool-material combinations. You can optionally
expand the database to 62 workpiece material-cutting material
combinations.
The CNC PILOT ascertains these criteria from the following
information:
Operating mode: An operating mode is assigned in the cycle
programming (Teach-in mode) to each cycle, and in smart.Turn to
each unit (see table).
Work material: The workpiece material is defined in the ITS menu Explanation of abbreviations used in the graphic:
during cycle programming, and in the program header in smart.Turn. Task: Machining mode
Cutting material: Each tool description contains the cutting WS: Workpiece material
material.
SS: Cutting material
Using these three criteria, the CNC PILOT accesses the cutting data
record (shown yellow in the figure) and generates from it the
technology-data proposal. Types of machining
Predrilling Not used
Roughing 2
Finishing 3
Thread cutting 4
Contour recessing 5
Parting 6
Centering 9
Drilling 8
Countersinking 9
Reaming Not used
Tapping 11
Milling 12
Finish milling 13
Deburring 14
Engraving 15
Recess turning 16

Technology editor
The technology editor can be called from the Tool Editor and
smart.Turn operating modes.
Database access of the following combinations are supported:
Work material/operating mode combinations (blue)
Cutting material/operating-mode combinations (red)
Work-material/tool-material combinations (green)
Editing workpiece and cutting material designations: The

technology editor keeps one list each with workpiece designations
and cutting material designations. You have the following options:
Insert new workpiece/cutting materials.
Do not change the workpiece material or cutting material
designations. Explanation of abbreviations used in the graphic:
Delete existing workpiece/cutting material designations. This also Task: Machining mode
deletes the associated cutting data.
SW: Work material
Remember when deleting workpiece material or cutting S: Cutting material
material designations:
This also deletes the associated cutting data.
The CNC PILOT cannot determine any cutting data for
the affected programs or tools. The reason:
The workpiece material designations are saved in the
program header of the smart.Turn programs.
Cutting material designations are saved together with
the tool data.
Editing the cutting data: The cutting data of a workpiece material/

cutting material combination are called a "data record". You have the
following options:
Assign cutting data to a workpiece material/cutting material
combination to create a data record.
Delete the cutting data of a workpiece material/cutting material
combination (a data record).

Editing a workpiece material or cutting material
list
Work material list
Select the "Work materials" menu item. The editor

opens the list with the workpiece material
designations.
Adding a workpiece material:

Press the soft key. Enter the workpiece designation
(maximum 16 characters). The sorting number is
assigned sequentially.
Deleting a workpiece material:

Press the soft key. After the confirmation request,
the CNC PILOT deletes the workpiece material with
all associated cutting data.
Cutting material list
Select the "Cutting materials" menu item. The editor

opens the list with the cutting material designations.
Adding a cutting material:

Press the soft key. Enter the cutting material
designation (maximum 16 characters). The sorting
number is assigned sequentially.
Deleting a cutting material:

Press the soft key. After the confirmation request,
the CNC PILOT deletes the cutting material with all
associated cutting data.
The sorting number only specifies the sequence within the list. To
change the sorting number: Select the sorting number, press the Edit
field soft key and enter the new number.
Expanding the workpiece-material or cutting-material lists

does not create cutting data. The data record for cutting
data of a new workpiece material/cutting material
combination is not created until you have requested it
through the New data record soft key.

Displaying/editing cutting data
Displaying cutting data of the machining modes:
8 Select the "Cutting data" menu item. The editor opens
the dialog for selecting a workpiece material/cutting
material combination.
8 Select the desired combination and press OK.
8 The technology editor displays the cutting data.
Displaying cutting data of the workpiece materials:
8 "Extras/.." menu item
8 „... Select "Work material table..." The editor opens

the dialog for selecting an operating mode/cutting
Displaying cutting data of the cutting materials:
8 "Extras/.." menu item
8 „... Select "Cutting material table." The editor opens

the dialog for selecting a workpiece material/
operating mode combination.
The value 0 in a data record means that no value is

transferred to the unit or cycle dialog.

Editing cutting data:
8 Call the table with cutting data.
8 With the arrow keys, select the cutting data field you want to edit.
8 Press the soft key.
8 Enter the value and confirm with the Enter key.

Adding new cutting data:
8 Set any workpiece-material/cutting material combinations.
8 Press the soft key. The editor opens the "New cutting
data" dialog box.
8 Set the new material/cutting material combinations.

8 Decide whether an existing workpiece material/cutting material
combination should be used as a template. Otherwise, all entries
with be preset with "0."
8 Press OK to create the new cutting data records.
Deleting a data record with cutting data:
8 Set the workpiece material/cutting material combination (data
record) to be deleted.
8 Press the soft key. The technology editor asks you if
you really want to delete the data record.
8 Press the soft key. The technology editor deletes the
data record of the given workpiece material/cutting


Organization Mode of
Operation
8.1 Organization Mode of Operation
8.1 Organization Mode of
Operation
This mode of operation offers various functions for communication Login code
with other systems, data backup, setting of parameters, and
diagnosis. Code number Possibilities
The following functions are available: Editing user parameters
Login code Transfer:
Some parameter settings and functions may only be accessed by
qualified personnel. Users need to enter a code number to log in to Transmit/Receive programs
this mode. Create service files
Parameter settings
Parameters enable you to adapt CNC PILOT to your specific 123 Editing all user parameters
requirements. The User parameter menu provides functions to Transfer
display and edit parameters.
Parameter backup
Transfer
The transfer functions are used either for exchange of data with Backup/Restore tools
other systems or for data backup. You can input and output
programs, parameters, and tool data. net123 Configuring the network (control
name / DHCP)
Diagnosis
The Diagnosis menu provides functions for checking the system Transfer
and for locating errors.
Parameter backup
The Configuration and Diagnosis functions can only be Backup/Restore tools
accessed by authorized commissioning and service
personnel. sik Options dialog box
Opens the dialog box for activating
software options via SIK (system
identification key)
Service code Editing configuration data

Diagnostic functions
Restoring the parameters
464 Organization Mode of Operation

8.2 Parameters
8.2 Parameters
Parameter editor
The parameter values are entered in the configuration editor.
Each parameter object has a name (e.g. CfgDisplayLanguage) that
gives information about the parameters it contains. Each object has a
key for unique identification.
The CNC PILOT displays an icon at the beginning of each line in the
parameter tree showing additional information about this line. The
icons have the following meanings:
Branch exists but is closed
Branch is open
Empty object, cannot be opened
Initialized machine parameter
Uninitialized (optional) machine parameter
Can be read but not edited
Can neither be read nor edited
User parameter (user parameters)

Parameters that are preset for the usual "daily operations" are
organized as User parameters.
To enable you to set machine-specific functions, your machine tool
builder make further parameters available as user parameters.
Refer to your machine tool manual.
Editing user parameters
Press the User parameters soft key.
Press soft key and enter the key number 123.

8.2 Parameters
Displaying help texts
Position the cursor on the parameter.
Press the info key.
The parameter editor opens the window with information on these

parameters.
Press the info key again to close the information

window.
Searching for parameters
Press the Find soft key.
Enter the search criteria.
Press the Find soft key again.
Exiting the parameter editor
Press the End soft key.

8.2 Parameters
List of user parameters
Language setting:
Parameter: NC and PLC conversational language settings / ...

... / NC conversational language (101301)
ENGLISH
GERMAN
CZECH
FRENCH
ITALIAN
SPANISH
PORTUGUESE
SWEDISH
DANISH
FINNISH
DUTCH
POLISH
HUNGARIAN
RUSSIAN
CHINESE
CHINESE_TRAD
SLOVENIAN
ESTONIAN
KOREAN
LATVIAN
NORWEGIAN
ROMANIAN
SLOVAK
TURKISH
LITHUANIAN
... / PLC conversational language (101302)
See NC conversational language
... / PLC error message language (101303)
... / Language for online help (101304)

8.2 Parameters
General settings:
Parameter: System / ... Meaning

... / Definition of the units of measure valid for the display (101100)
/ ...
... / Unit of measure for display and user interface (101101)
metric Use the metric system
inch Use the inch system
... / General settings for automatic operation (601800) / ...
.../ Service life management (601801)
ON Tool life monitoring is active
OFF Tool life monitoring is inactive
... / Tool measurement (604600)
Measuring feed rate [mm/min] (604602) Feed rate for approaching the touch probe
Measuring range [mm] (604603) The touch probe must be triggered within the
measuring range. Otherwise, an error message is
issued.

8.2 Parameters
Settings for the simulation:
Parameter: Simulation / ... Meaning

... / General settings (114800) / ...
... / Restart with M99 (114801)
ON Simulation begins again at beginning of program
OFF Simulation stops
... / Traverse delay [s] (114802) Delay time after each path has been graphically
simulated. The simulation speed can thus be
influenced.
... / Machining times for the NC functions in general (115000) / ... These times are used as nonmachining times for the
time calculation function.
... / Time allowance for tool change [s] (115001)
... / Time allowance for gear shifting [s] (115002)
... / General time allowance for M functions [s] (115003)
... / Machining times for M functions (115100) / ... Individual time allowances for a maximum of 14 M
functions
... / T01 / ...
... / Number of the M function
... / Operating time of the M function [s] The time calculation adds this time to the "General
time allowance for M functions."
... / T14
... / Specification of the (standard) window size (115200) The simulation function adapts the window size to the
workpiece blank. If no blank part is programmed, the
simulation uses a standard window size.
... / Zero point position in X [mm] (115201) Distance of the coordinate origin from the lower
window edge.
... / Zero point position in Z [mm] (115202) Distance of the coordinate origin from the left edge of
the window.
... / Delta X [mm] (115203) Vertical expansion of the graphic window
... / Delta Z [mm] (115204) Horizontal expansion of the graphic window
... / Specification of the (standard) workpiece blank size (115300) If no blank part is programmed in DIN PLUS, the
simulation uses a "standard blank."
... / Outside diameter [mm] (115301)
... / Workpiece blank length [mm] (115302)
... / Right edge of workpiece blank [mm] (115303)
... / Inside diameter [mm] (115304)

8.2 Parameters
Settings for fixed cycles and units:
Parameters: processing / ... Meaning

... / General settings (602000) / ...
... / External safety clearance (SAR) [mm] (602005) External safety clearance on workpiece blank
... / Internal safety clearance (SIR) [mm] (602006) Internal safety clearance on workpiece blank
... / External on machined part (SAT) [mm] (602007) External safety clearance on machined part
... / Internal on machined part (SIT) [mm] (602008) Internal safety clearance on machined part
... / G14 for new units (602009) Default value for "tool change point G14."
... / Coolant for new units (602010) Default value for "coolant CLT":
0: Without (coolant)
1: Circuit 1 on
2: Circuit 2 on
... / G60 for new units (602011) Default value for "protection zone":
0: Active
1: Inactive
... / Safety clearance G47 [mm] (602012) Default value for "safety clearance G47":
... / Safety clearance, G147 infeed direction [mm] (602013) Default value for "safety clearance SCK"
... / Safety clearance, G147 plane [mm] (602014) Default value for "safety clearance SCI"
... / Oversize in X direction [mm] (602015) Default value for "oversize (X) I"
... / Oversize in Z direction [mm] (602016) Default value for "oversize (Z) K"

8.3 Transfer
8.3 Transfer
The Transfer mode is used for data backup and data exchange via
networks or USB devices. When we speak of "files" in the following,
we mean programs, parameters and tool data. The following file types
can be transferred:
Programs (cycle programs, smart.Turn programs, DIN main and
subprograms, ICP contour descriptions)
Parameters
Tool data
Data backup
HEIDENHAIN recommends backing up the tool data and programs
created on CNC PILOT on an external device at regular intervals.
You should also back up the parameters. Since the parameters are not
changed very often, however, you only need to back up the
parameters from time to time, as required.
Data exchange with TNCremo

HEIDENHAIN offers the PC program TNCremo to complement the
CNC PILOT control. This program enables you to access the control
data from a PC.

8.3 Transfer
Connections
You can establish connections over the network (Ethernet) or with a
USB storage device. Data is transferred over the Ethernet or USB
interface.
Network (via Ethernet): The CNC PILOT supports SMB networks
(Server Message Block, WINDOWS) and NFS networks (Network
File Service).
USB storage devices can be connected directly to the control. The
CNC PILOT uses only the first partition of a USB storage device.
Other computer systems in the network may overwrite
CNC PILOT programs. Organize your network in such a
way that only authorized persons have access to CNC
PILOT.
Configuring network connections

Select the Organization mode and log on with the code number
"net123".
Press the Transfer soft key (login required).
Press the Connections soft key.
Press the Network soft key.
The CNC PILOT opens the Network connection dialog box. This dialog
box is for the settings for the connection target.
Press the Config. soft key (login required). The

Network configuration dialog box opens.

8.3 Transfer
Network configuration settings
8 Control name - Computer name of the control
8 DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol)
OFF: The other network settings have to be configured manually.
Static IP address.
ON: The network settings are automatically configured by a DHCP
server.
8 Settings for DHCP OFF
IP address
Subnet mask
Broadcast
Gateway
Network connection settings (SMB)
8 Protocol
Network configuration soft keys
SMB – Windows network
Creates a folder of the specified
8 Host IP address/host name – Computer name or IP address of the name in the target path when a
target computer. connection is established.
8 Host release – Share name of the target computer. (Sharename)
8 User name – For logging on to the target computer. Opens the Network configuration
dialog box.
8 Workgroup/Domain – Name of the workgroup/domain.
8 Password – For logging on to the target computer. Opens the Check network
Network connection settings (NFS) connection dialog box and pings the
specified target.
8 Protocol
NFS Displays all the network information
in a list box.
8 Host IP address – IP address of the target computer.
8 Host release – Share name of the target computer. (Sharename) Terminates an existing network
8 rsize - connection. When a USB storage
device is active, the control
8 wsize -
switches to the USB connection.
8 time0 -
8 soft - Establishes the connection and
opens the last project folder you
Select project folder: The CNC PILOT reads and writes all the data to/ selected.
from a predefined project folder. Each project folder mirrors the folder
structure on the control. Select the project folder you want to connect Returns to the Transfer soft-key
to. If no project folder exists in the target path, the folder is created menu.
when connecting.

8.3 Transfer
USB connection
Select the Organization mode and plug the USB storage device in at
the USB port on the CNC PILOT.
Press the USB soft key.
The CNC PILOT opens the USB dialog box. This dialog box is for the
settings for the connection target.
Soft keys for USB connection
Creates a folder of the specified name
Use the soft keys to disconnect and reconnect USB on the USB storage device.
storage devices.
Disconnects the USB storage device
and prepares the device for removal.
Allows access to files that have not

been properly saved in a project
In principle, it should be possible to connect most USB folder.
devices to the control. It may happen that a USB device is
not identified correctly by the control, for example when Selects the project folder highlighted
the cable between the control panel and the main previously using the arrow keys.
computer is very long. In such cases, use another USB
device. Returns to the Transfer soft-key
menu.

8.3 Transfer
Data transfer options
The CNC PILOT manages DIN programs, DIN subprograms, cycle Folder structure – Storage of files
programs and ICP contours in different directories. When you select
"Program group," the control automatically switches to the applicable Folders File types
directory.
\gti ICP contour descriptions
Parameters and tool data are stored under the file name entered for
Backup name and saved to a ZIP file located in the "para" or "tool" folder *.gmi (turning contour)
on the control. You can then send this backup file to a project folder in *.gmr (workpiece-blank contour)
the remote station. *.gms (C axis, face)
*.gmm (C axis, surface)
If program files are opened in another operating mode,
they are not overwritten. \gtz Cycle programs (teach-in)
You can only load tool data and parameters when no
program is executed in Program Run mode. *.gmz
\ncps DIN programs (smart.Turn)

The following transfer functions are available:
*.nc (main programs)
Programs: Transmitting and receiving files *.ncs (subprograms)
Back up parameters: Creating, transmitting and receiving
Restore parameters: Reloading the parameter backup files \para Parameter backup files
Backup tools: Creating, transmitting and receiving PA_*.zip (parameters)
Restore tools: Reloading the tool backup files
\table Parameter backup files
Service data: Creating and transmitting service data
TA*.zip (tables)
Make data backup: Saving all data in a project folder
Free external: Freely selecting program files on a USB storage \tool Tool backup files
device
TO*.zip (tool data and technology
Misc. functions: Importing the cycle programs and DIN programs of data)
the MANUALplus 4110
Project folder \pictures Image files for subprograms
The control exchanges data with an external storage device by *.bmp/png/jpg
accessing project folders created in the storage device. Files in project
folders are organized using the same folder structure as on the control. \data Service files
Project folders can only be used directly in the selected network path Service*.zip
or in the root directory of the USB storage device.

8.3 Transfer
Transferring programs (files)
Selecting the program group
Press the USB soft key.
Press the Network soft key.
Select a project folder and press the Selection soft

Soft keys for program group selection
key (USB), or the
*.nc: DIN and smart.Turn main
programs. The transfer function scans
Connect (network) soft key. the programs for subprograms and
asks whether you want to transfer
them as well.
Return to data selection. *.ncs: DIN and smart.Turn

subprograms. Help graphics assigned
to the subprogram are also
transferred.
Switch to program transfer.
*.gmz: Cycle programs. The transfer
function scans the programs for
subprograms and ICP contours, and
asks whether you want to transfer
Open a selection of program types. them as well.
Activate DIN programs (or other program types) for ICP contours for cycle programs
transfer. *.gmi (turning contour)
*.gmr (workpiece-blank contour)
*.gms (C axis, face)
*.gmm (C axis, lateral surface)
Allows selecting program files on a

USB storage device without using a
project folder.
Masking the file names within the

selected program group.

8.3 Transfer
Selecting the program
In the window on the left, the CNC PILOT shows a file list of the
control. The files of the remote station are displayed in the window on
the right when a connection is established. With the cursor keys you
can switch back and forth between the two windows.
When selecting a program, place the cursor on the desired program
and press the Mark soft key. You can also select all programs with Mark
everything.
Marked programs are highlighted in color. To unmark a program,
simply press Mark once again.
The CNC PILOT displays the file size and the time of the last
modification of the program in the list if permitted by the length of the
file name.
With DIN programs/subprograms, you can also view the NC program
with the Program view soft key.
Press the Transmit or Receive soft key to start transferring the files.
During transfer, the CNC PILOT displays the following information in a
transfer window (see illustration):
The name of the program which is currently being transferred.
If a file already exists in the target path, the CNC PILOT asks
whether you want to overwrite the file. You can then activate
overwriting for only that file or for all files in the transfer.
If the CNC PILOT detects during transfer that the transferred files are
linked to other files (subprograms, ICP contours), a dialog box opens
where you can select the linked files for transfer.
Soft keys for program selection

Marks all files in the current window.
Marks or unmarks the file at the

cursor position and moves the cursor
down one position.
Opens a DIN main program or

subprogram for reading.

8.3 Transfer
Transferring parameters
Parameters are backed up in two steps:
Creating a parameter backup: The parameters are archived in ZIP
files and stored in the control.
Transmit/receive the parameter backup files.
Restoring parameters: Restores the backup files into the active
data on the CNC PILOT (login required).
Parameter selection
You can also create a parameter backup without connecting to an
external storage device.
Open the parameter transfer.

Soft keys for parameter transfer
Transmits all marked files from the
control to the remote station.
Parameter backup data
Receives all files marked on the
A parameter backup file contains all the parameters and tables of the
CNC PILOT except tool and technology data. remote station.
Path and file names of the backup files: Deletes all marked files after a
Config data: \para\PA_*.zip confirmation prompt (login required).
Tables: \table\TA_*.zip
Creates a parameter backup data
The transfer window only shows the "para" folder. The associated file record as a .zip file.
in the "table" folder is automatically created and transferred.
Press the Transmit or Receive soft key to start transferring the files. Restores data from the selected
backup data record to the active
control system (login required).

down one position.

8.3 Transfer
Transferring tool data
Tools are backed up in two steps:
Creating a tool backup: The parameters are archived in ZIP files
and stored in the control.
Transmit/receive the tool backup files.
Restoring tools: Restores the backup files into the active data on
the CNC PILOT (login required).
Tool selection
You can also create a tool backup without connecting to an external
storage device.
Open the tool transfer. Soft keys for tool transfer

Transmits all marked files from the
Tool backup data Receives all files marked on the

remote station.
A tool backup file contains all the tool and technology data as well as
the tool texts.
Deletes all marked files after a
Path and file names of the backup files: confirmation prompt (login required).
\tool\TO_*.zip
Creates a tool backup data record as a
Press the Transmit or Receive soft key to start transferring the files. .zip file.
Restores data from the now selected

backup data record to the active
control system (login required).

down one position.

8.3 Transfer
Service files
Service files contain various log files used by the service department Soft keys for transferring service files
for troubleshooting. All important information is summarized in a
services file record as a zip file. Transmits all marked files from the
Path and file names of the backup files:
\data\SERVICEx.zip ("x" stands for a consecutive number) Deletes all marked files after a
confirmation prompt (login required).
The CNC PILOT always generates the service file with the number
"1". Already existing files are renamed to the numbers 2 to 5. An
existing file with the number 5 is deleted.
Creating service files: The information is summarized in a ZIP file
and stored in the control. Marks or unmarks the file at the
Transmit service files. cursor position and moves the cursor
down one position.
Service selection
You can also create service files without connecting to an external Creates a service files data record as
storage device. a .zip file.
Open the service data transfer.

8.3 Transfer
Creating a data backup file
A data backup performs the following steps: Soft keys for data backup
Copies the program files to the project folder. Starts backing up the data to a
NC main programs complete project folder
NC subprograms (with graphics)
Cycle programs
ICP contours
Creates a parameter backup and copies all backup files from "\para"
and "\table" to the project folder. (PA_Backup.zip, TA_Backup.zip)
Creates a tool backup file and copies all tool backup files from "\tool"
to the project folder (TO_Backup.zip).
Service files are not created and copied.
Data backup selection
Press the soft key and enter the login code.
Press the Transfer soft key.
Open the data backup transfer.
Existing files will be overwritten without a confirmation

prompt.
To cancel the data backup, press the Cancel soft key.
The backup process stops as soon as the currently
running partial backup is completed.

8.3 Transfer
Importing NC programs from predecessor
controls
The program formats of the predecessor controls CNC PILOT 4110
and CNC PILOT 4290 differ from the format of the CNC PILOT.
However, you can use the program converter to adapt programs of the
predecessor control to the new control. This converter is a component
of the CNC PILOT. The converter completes the required adaptations
as automatically as possible.
Overview of convertible NC part programs:
MANUALplus 4110
Cycle programs
ICP contour descriptions
DIN programs
CNC PILOT 4290: DIN PLUS programs
TURN PLUS programs of the CNC PILOT 4290 cannot be converted.
Importing NC programs from the connected data medium
Open the menu with the miscellaneous functions.
Open the menu with the import functions.
Selection of cycle programs or ICP contours of the

MANUALplus 4110 (*.gtz).
Selection of DIN programs ...
... of the MANUALplus 4110 (*.nc/ *.ncs).
Selection of DIN programs ...
... of the CNC PILOT 4290 (*.nc/ *.ncs).

8.3 Transfer
Use the cursor keys to select the folder, then press
the Enter key to switch to the right window.
With the cursor keys, select the NC program to be converted.
Mark all NC programs.
Start the import filter for converting the program(s) to

the CNC PILOT format.
The names of imported cycle programs, ICP contour

descriptions, DIN programs and DIN subprograms are
given the prefix "CONV_..." In addition, the CNC PILOT
adapts the extension and imports the NC programs to the
correct folders.
Converting cycle programs

MANUALplus 4110 and CNC PILOT have different solutions for tool
management, technology data, etc. Also, the cycles of the CNC PILOT
have more parameters than those of the MANUALplus 4110.
Please note the following:
Tool call: The loading of the T number depends on whether the
program is a "multifix program" (2-digit T number) or "turret program"
(4-digit T number).
2-digit T number: The T number is loaded as "ID" and entered as
the T number "T1".
4-digit T number (Tddpp): The first two digits of the T number (dd)
are loaded as "ID" and the last two (pp) as "T".
Moving to the tool change point: In tool change point G14, the
converter enters the "no axis" setting. In the MANUALplus 4110 this
parameter is not used.
Safety clearance: The safety clearances defined in the "general
settings" parameter are entered by the converter in the safety
clearance G47, ... SCI, ... SCK fields.
M functions are left unchanged.
Calling ICP contours: When an ICP contour is called, the converter
prefixes "CONV_..." to the name.
Calling DIN cycles: When a DIN cycle is called, the converter
prefixes "CONV_..." to the name.
HEIDENHAIN recommends adapting converted NC

programs to the circumstances of the CNC PILOT and
then testing them before using them for production.

8.3 Transfer
Converting DIN programs
DIN/ISO programs not only have new solutions for tool management,
technology data, etc., but also for contour description and variable
programming.
Remember the following when converting DIN/ISO programs of the
MANUALplus 4110:
Tool call: The loading of the T number depends on whether the
program is a "multifix program" (2-digit T number) or "turret program"
(4-digit T number).
2-digit T number: The T number is loaded as "ID" and entered as
the T number "T1".
4-digit T number (Tddpp): The first two digits of the T number (dd)
are loaded as "ID" and the last two (pp) as "T".
Workpiece-blank definition: A G20/G21 workpiece-blank
definition of the MANUALplus 4110 becomes an AUXILIARY
BLANK on the CNC PILOT.
Contour descriptions: In MANUALplus 4110 programs, the fixed
cycles are followed by the contour description. During conversion
the contour description is converted to an AUXILIARY CONTOUR.
The associated cycle in the MACHINING section then refers to this
auxiliary contour.
Variable programming: Variable accesses to tool data, machine
dimensions, D compensation values, parameter data and events
cannot be converted. These program sequences have to be
adapted.
Inches or metric: The converter cannot detect the unit of measure
of the MANUALplus 4110 program. Consequently, no unit of
measure is entered in the target program. This has to be completed
by the user.

8.3 Transfer
Remember the following when converting DIN programs of the
CNC PILOT 4290:
Tool call (T commands of the TURRET section):
T commands containing a reference to the tool database are left
unchanged (example: T1 ID“342-300.1“).
T commands containing tool data cannot be converted.
Variable programming: Variable accesses to tool data, machine
dimensions, D compensation values, parameter data and events
cannot be converted. These program sequences have to be
adapted.
Names of external subprograms: When an external subprogram
is called, the converter prefixes "CONV_..." to the name.
If the DIN program contains nonconvertible elements, the

corresponding NC block is saved as a comment. The word
WARNING is inserted in front of this comment. Depending
on the situation, the nonconvertible command is taken into
the comment line, or the nonconvertible NC block follows
the comment.
HEIDENHAIN recommends adapting converted NC

programs to the circumstances of theCNC PILOT and then
testing them before using them for production.

8.4 Service Pack
8.4 Service Pack
If changes or additional features are required in the control software,
your machine tool builder will provide you with a service pack. The
service pack is usually installed with the aid of a USB memory stick
(1 GB or larger). The software required for the service pack is
compressed in the setup.zip file. This file is saved on the USB stick.
Installing a service pack

The control has to be shut-down during the installation of the service
pack. So end any NC program editing, etc. before you begin
installation.
HEIDENHAIN recommends backing up your data before

installing the service pack (see page 481).
Connect a USB stick and switch to the Organization mode of

operation.
Press soft key and enter the code number 231019.
Press the soft key. (If the soft key is not visible,
switch the soft-key menu.)
Press the soft key.
Press the Path soft key to select the directory in the

left window.
Press the Files soft key to select the file in the right
window.
Place the cursor on the "setup.zip" file and press the

SELECT soft key.
The CNC PILOT checks whether the service pack can be used for the
current software version of the control.

8.4 Service Pack
Answer the confirmation prompt "Do you really want to switch off?"
Then the actual update program starts.
Set the desired language (e.g. English) and do the update.
During installation of the service pack the CNC PILOT writes the
relevant program and data of the older software to the selected folder
of the USB stick. The file created in this way begins with "REDO_".
After the software update the CNC PILOT automatically

restarts.
Keep the the USB stick so that you can undo the
installation of the service pack if necessary.
Uninstalling a service pack

The USB stick used to install the service pack is also used for its
uninstallation. The required "REDO" files are in the same folder used
for the installation of the service pack.
Back up the NC programs or parameters you have created

or changed after the installation of the service pack before
returning to the previous software version! The previous
software level is restored with the uninstallation of the
service pack. Parameters that were created or changed
can get lost!

8.4 Service Pack
Uninstallation of the service pack
Connect a USB stick and switch to the Organization mode of

operation.
Press soft key and enter the code number 231019.
Press the soft key.
Press the soft key.
Switch on the UNDO UPDATE soft key.
Press the Path soft key to select the directory in the

left window.
Press the Files soft key to select the file in the right
window.
Place the cursor on the "setup.zip" file and press the

SELECT soft key. (This folder also contains the "REDO"
files.)
The CNC PILOT checks whether the software level of the selected file
is the same as that on the control.
Answer the confirmation prompt "Do you really want to switch off?"
Then the actual uninstallation program starts.
Set the desired language (e.g. English) and do the uninstallation.


9.1 Thread Pitch
9.1 Thread Pitch
Thread parameters
To determine the thread parameters, the CNC PILOT uses the
following table.
Where:
F: Thread pitch. Where an asterisk “*” is given in the table, the
thread pitch is calculated from the diameter, depending on the
thread type (See “Thread pitch” on page 491.) .
P: Thread depth
R: Thread width
A: Thread angle. left
W: Thread angle. right
Calculation formula: Kb = 0.26384*F – 0.1*√F
Thread backlash "ac" (depending on thread pitch):
Thread pitch <= 1: ac = 0.15
Thread pitch <= 13: ac = 1
Thread type Q F P R A W
Q=1 Metric ISO fine-pitch thread External – 0.61343*F F 30° 30°
Internal – 0.54127*F F 30° 30°
Q=2 Metric ISO thread External * 0.61343*F F 30° 30°
Internal * 0.54127*F F 30° 30°
Q=3 Metric ISO tapered thread External – 0.61343*F F 30° 30°
Q=4 Metric ISO tapered fine-pitch thread – 0.61343*F F 30° 30°
Q=5 Metric ISO trapezoid thread External – 0.5*F+ac 0.633*F 15° 15°
Internal – 0.5*F+ac 0.633*F 15° 15°
Q=6 Flat metric trapezoid thread External – 0.3*F+ac 0.527*F 15° 15°
Internal – 0.3*F+ac 0.527*F 15° 15°
Q=7 Metric buttress thread External – 0.86777*F 0.73616*F 3° 30°
Internal – 0.75*F F–Kb 30° 3°
Q=8 Cylindrical round thread External * 0.5*F F 15° 15°
Internal * 0.5*F F 15° 15°
Q=9 Cylindrical Whitworth thread External * 0.64033*F F 27.5° 27.5°
Internal * 0.64033*F F 27.5° 27.5°
Q=10 Tapered Whitworth thread External * 0.640327*F F 27.5° 27.5°
Q=11 Whitworth pipe thread External * 0.640327*F F 27.5° 27.5°
Internal * 0.640327*F F 27.5° 27.5°
490 Tables and Overviews

9.1 Thread Pitch
Thread type Q F P R A W
Q=12 Nonstandard thread – – – – –
Q=13 UNC US coarse thread External * 0.61343*F F 30° 30°
Internal * 0.54127*F F 30° 30°
Q=14 UNF US fine-pitch thread External * 0.61343*F F 30° 30°
Internal * 0.54127*F F 30° 30°
Q=15 UNEF U.S. extra-fine-pitch thread External * 0.61343*F F 30° 30°
Internal * 0.54127*F F 30° 30°
Q=16 NPT U.S. taper pipe thread External * 0.8*F F 30° 30°
Internal * 0.8*F F 30° 30°
Q=17 NPTF U.S. taper dryseal pipe thread External * 0.8*F F 30° 30°
Internal * 0.8*F F 30° 30°
Q=18 NPSC U.S. cylindrical pipe thread with lubricant External * 0.8*F F 30° 30°
Internal * 0.8*F F 30° 30°
Q=19 NPFS U.S. cylindrical pipe thread without External * 0.8*F F 30° 30°
lubricant
Internal * 0.8*F F 30° 30°
Thread pitch
Q = 2 Metric ISO thread
Diameter Thread pitch Diameter Thread pitch Diameter Thread pitch
1 0.25 6 1 27 3
1.1 0.25 7 1 30 3.5
1.2 0.25 8 1.25 33 3.5
1.4 0.3 9 1.25 36 4
1.6 0.35 10 1.5 39 4
1.8 0.35 11 1.5 42 4.5
2 0.4 12 1.75 45 4.5
2.2 0.45 14 2 48 5
2.5 0.45 16 2 52 5
3 0.5 18 2.5 56 5.5
3.5 0.6 20 2.5 60 5.5
4 0.7 22 2.5 64 6
4.5 0.75 24 3 68 6
5 0.8

9.1 Thread Pitch
Q = 8 Cylindrical round thread
Diameter Thread pitch

12 2.54
14 3.175
40 4.233
105 6.35
200 6.35
Q = 9 Cylindrical Whitworth thread

Thread Diameter Thread Diameter
Thread pitch Thread pitch
designation (in mm) designation (in mm)
1/4“ 6.35 1.27 1 1/4“ 31.751 3.629
5/16“ 7.938 1.411 1 3/8“ 34.926 4.233
3/8“ 9.525 1.588 1 1/2“ 38.101 4.233
7/16“ 11.113 1.814 1 5/8“ 41.277 5.08
1/2“ 12.7 2.117 1 3/4“ 44.452 5.08
5/8“ 15.876 2.309 1 7/8“ 47.627 5.645
3/4“ 19.051 2.54 2“ 50.802 5.645
7/8“ 22.226 2.822 2 1/4“ 57.152 6.35
1“ 25.401 3.175 2 1/2“ 63.502 6.35
1 1/8“ 28.576 3.629 2 3/4“ 69.853 7.257
Q = 10 Tapered Whitworth thread

1/16“ 7.723 0.907 1 1/2“ 47.803 2.309
1/8“ 9.728 0.907 2“ 59.614 2.309
1/4“ 13.157 1.337 2 1/2“ 75.184 2.309
3/8“ 16.662 1.337 3“ 87.884 2.309
1/2“ 20.995 1.814 4“ 113.03 2.309
3/4“ 26.441 1.814 5“ 138.43 2.309
1“ 33.249 2.309 6“ 163.83 2.309
1 1/4“ 41.91 2.309

9.1 Thread Pitch
Q = 11 Whitworth pipe thread
1/8“ 9.728 0.907 2“ 59.614 2.309
1/4“ 13.157 1.337 2 1/4“ 65.71 2.309
3/8“ 16.662 1.337 2 1/2“ 75.184 2.309
1/2“ 20.995 1.814 2 3/4“ 81.534 2.309
5/8“ 22.911 1.814 3“ 87.884 2.309
3/4“ 26.441 1.814 3 1/4“ 93.98 2.309
7/8“ 30.201 1.814 3 1/2“ 100.33 2.309
1“ 33.249 2.309 3 3/4“ 106.68 2.309
1 1/8“ 37.897 2.309 4“ 113.03 2.309
1 1/4“ 41.91 2.309 4 1/2“ 125.73 2.309
1 3/8“ 44.323 2.309 5“ 138.43 2.309
1 1/2“ 47.803 2.309 5 1/2“ 151.13 2.309
1 3/4“ 53.746 1.814 6“ 163.83 2.309
Q = 13 UNC US coarse thread

0.073“ 1.8542 0.396875 7/8“ 22.225 2.822222222
0.086“ 2.1844 0.453571428 1“ 25.4 3.175
0.099“ 2.5146 0.529166666 1 1/8“ 28.575 3.628571429
0.112“ 2.8448 0.635 1 1/4“ 31.75 3.628571429
0.125“ 3.175 0.635 1 3/8“ 34.925 4.233333333
0.138“ 3.5052 0.79375 1 1/2“ 38.1 4.233333333
0.164“ 4.1656 0.79375 1 3/4“ 44.45 5.08
0.19“ 4.826 1.058333333 2“ 50.8 5.644444444
0.216“ 5.4864 1.058333333 2 1/4“ 57.15 5.644444444
1/4“ 6.35 1.27 2 1/2“ 63.5 6.35
5/16“ 7.9375 1.411111111 2 3/4“ 69.85 6.35
3/8“ 9.525 1.5875 3“ 76.2 6.35
7/16“ 11.1125 1.814285714 3 1/4“ 82.55 6.35
1/2“ 12.7 1.953846154 3 1/2“ 88.9 6.35
9/16“ 14.2875 2.116666667 3 3/4“ 95.25 6.35
5/8“ 15.875 2.309090909 4“ 101.6 6.35
3/4“ 19.05 2.54

9.1 Thread Pitch
Q = 14 UNF US fine-pitch thread
0.06“ 1.524 0.3175 3/8“ 9.525 1.058333333
0.073“ 1.8542 0.352777777 7/16“ 11.1125 1.27
0.086“ 2.1844 0.396875 1/2“ 12.7 1.27
0.099“ 2.5146 0.453571428 9/16“ 14.2875 1.411111111
0.112“ 2.8448 0.529166666 5/8“ 15.875 1.411111111
0.125“ 3.175 0.577272727 3/4“ 19.05 1.5875
0.138“ 3.5052 0.635 7/8“ 22.225 1.814285714
0.164“ 4.1656 0.705555555 1“ 25.4 1.814285714
0.19“ 4.826 0.79375 1 1/8“ 28.575 2.116666667
0.216“ 5.4864 0.907142857 1 1/4“ 31.75 2.116666667
1/4“ 6.35 0.907142857 1 3/8“ 34.925 2.116666667
5/16“ 7.9375 1.058333333 1 1/2“ 38.1 2.116666667
Q = 15 UNEF US extra-fine-pitch thread

0.216“ 5.4864 0.79375 1 1/16“ 26.9875 1.411111111
1/4“ 6.35 0.79375 1 1/8“ 28.575 1.411111111
5/16“ 7.9375 0.79375 1 3/16“ 30.1625 1.411111111
3/8“ 9.525 0.79375 1 1/4“ 31.75 1.411111111
7/16“ 11.1125 0.907142857 1 5/16“ 33.3375 1.411111111
1/2“ 12.7 0.907142857 1 3/8“ 34.925 1.411111111
9/16“ 14.2875 1.058333333 1 7/16“ 36.5125 1.411111111
5/8“ 15.875 1.058333333 1 1/2“ 38.1 1.411111111
11/16“ 17.4625 1.058333333 1 9/16“ 39.6875 1.411111111
3/4“ 19.05 1.27 1 5/8“ 41.275 1.411111111
13/16“ 20.6375 1.27 1 11/16“ 42.8625 1.411111111
7/8“ 22.225 1.27 1 3/4“ 44.45 1.5875
15/16“ 23.8125 1.27 2“ 50.8 1.5875
1“ 25.4 1.27

9.1 Thread Pitch
Q = 16 NPT US taper pipe thread
1/16“ 7.938 0.94074074 3 1/2“ 101.6 3.175
1/8“ 10.287 0.94074074 4“ 114.3 3.175
1/4“ 13.716 1.411111111 5“ 141.3 3.175
3/8“ 17.145 1.411111111 6“ 168.275 3.175
1/2“ 21.336 1.814285714 8“ 219.075 3.175
3/4“ 26.67 1.814285714 10“ 273.05 3.175
1“ 33.401 2.208695652 12“ 323.85 3.175
1 1/4“ 42.164 2.208695652 14“ 355.6 3.175
1 1/2“ 48.26 2.208695652 16“ 406.4 3.175
2“ 60.325 2.208695652 18“ 457.2 3.175
2 1/2“ 73.025 3.175 20“ 508 3.175
3“ 88.9 3.175 24“ 609.6 3.175
Q = 17 NPTF US taper dryseal pipe thread

1/16“ 7.938 0.94074074 1“ 33.401 2.208695652
1/8“ 10.287 0.94074074 1 1/4“ 42.164 2.208695652
1/4“ 13.716 1.411111111 1 1/2“ 48.26 2.208695652
3/8“ 17.145 1.411111111 2“ 60.325 2.208695652
1/2“ 21.336 1.814285714 2 1/2“ 73.025 3.175
3/4“ 26.67 1.814285714 3“ 88.9 3.175

9.1 Thread Pitch
Q = 18 NPSC U.S. cylindrical pipe thread with lubricant
1/8“ 10.287 0.94074074 1 1/2“ 48.26 2.208695652
1/4“ 13.716 1.411111111 2“ 60.325 2.208695652
3/8“ 17.145 1.411111111 2 1/2“ 73.025 3.175
1/2“ 21.336 1.814285714 3“ 88.9 3.175
3/4“ 26.67 1.814285714 3 1/2“ 101.6 3.175
1“ 33.401 2.208695652 4“ 114.3 3.175
1 1/4“ 42.164 2.208695652
Q = 19 NPFS U.S. cylindrical pipe thread without lubricant

1/16“ 7.938 0.94074074 1/2“ 21.336 1.814285714
1/8“ 10.287 0.94074074 3/4“ 26.67 1.814285714
1/4“ 13.716 1.411111111 1“ 33.401 2.208695652
3/8“ 17.145 1.411111111

9.2 Undercut Parameters
DIN 76—undercut parameters
The CNC PILOT determines the parameters for the thread undercut
(undercut DIN 76) from the thread pitch. The undercut parameters are
in accordance with DIN 13 for metric threads.
External thread External thread

Thread pitch I K R W Thread pitch I K R W
0.2 0.3 0.7 0.1 30° 1.25 2 4.4 0.6 30°
0.25 0.4 0.9 0.12 30° 1.5 2.3 5.2 0.8 30°
0.3 0.5 1.05 0.16 30° 1.75 2.6 6.1 1 30°
0.35 0.6 1.2 0.16 30° 2 3 7 1 30°
0.4 0.7 1.4 0.2 30° 2.5 3.6 8.7 1.2 30°
0.45 0.7 1.6 0.2 30° 3 4.4 10.5 1.6 30°
0.5 0.8 1.75 0.2 30° 3.5 5 12 1.6 30°
0.6 1 2.1 0.4 30° 4 5.7 14 2 30°
0.7 1.1 2.45 0.4 30° 4.5 6.4 16 2 30°
0.75 1.2 2.6 0.4 30° 5 7 17.5 2.5 30°
0.8 1.3 2.8 0.4 30° 5.5 7.7 19 3.2 30°
1 1.6 3.5 0.6 30° 6 8.3 21 3.2 30°

Internal thread Internal thread
Thread pitch I K R W Thread pitch I K R W
0.2 0.1 1.2 0.1 30° 1.25 0.5 6.7 0.6 30°
0.25 0.1 1.4 0.12 30° 1.5 0.5 7.8 0.8 30°
0.3 0.1 1.6 0.16 30° 1.75 0.5 9.1 1 30°
0.35 0.2 1.9 0.16 30° 2 0.5 10.3 1 30°
0.4 0.2 2.2 0.2 30° 2.5 0.5 13 1.2 30°
0.45 0.2 2.4 0.2 30° 3 0.5 15.2 1.6 30°
0.5 0.3 2.7 0.2 30° 3.5 0.5 17.7 1.6 30°
0.6 0.3 3.3 0.4 30° 4 0.5 20 2 30°
0.7 0.3 3.8 0.4 30° 4.5 0.5 23 2 30°
0.75 0.3 4 0.4 30° 5 0.5 26 2.5 30°
0.8 0.3 4.2 0.4 30° 5.5 0.5 28 3.2 30°
1 0.5 5.2 0.6 30° 6 0.5 30 3.2 30°
For internal threads, the CNC PILOT calculates the depth of the thread
undercut according to the following formula:
Undercut depth = (N + I – K) / 2
Where:
I: Undercut depth (radius)
K: Undercut width
R: Undercut radius
W: Undercut angle
N: Nominal diameter of the thread
I: From the table
K: Core diameter of the thread

DIN 509 E – undercut parameters
Diameter I K R W
<=1.6 0.1 0.5 0.1 15°
> 1.6 – 3 0.1 1 0.2 15°
> 3 – 10 0.2 2 0.2 15°
> 10 – 18 0.2 2 0.6 15°
> 18 – 80 0.3 2.5 0.6 15°
> 80 0.4 4 1 15°
The undercut parameters are determined from the cylinder diameter.

Where:
I: Undercut depth
K: Undercut width
R: Undercut radius
W: Undercut angle
DIN 509 F – undercut parameters
Diameter I K R W P A
<=1.6 0.1 0.5 0.1 15° 0.1 8°
> 1.6 – 3 0.1 1 0.2 15° 0.1 8°
> 3 – 10 0.2 2 0.2 15° 0.1 8°
> 10 – 18 0.2 2 0.6 15° 0.1 8°
> 18 – 80 0.3 2.5 0.6 15° 0.2 8°
> 80 0.4 4 1 15° 0.3 8°
The undercut parameters are determined from the cylinder diameter.

Where:
I: Undercut depth
K: Undercut width
R: Undercut radius
W: Undercut angle
P: Face depth
A: Transverse angle

9.3 Technical Information
Specifications
Components MC 6120 main computer

CC 6106/CC 6108 controller unit
TE 615 QT operating panel
15-inch TFT color flat-panel display
Operating system HEROS real-time operating system for machine control
Memory 250 MB (on CFR compact flash memory card) for NC programs
Input resolution and display step X axis: 0.5 µm, diameter: 1 µm

Z axis: 1 µm
Y axis: 1 µm
C axis: 0.001°
Interpolation Straight line: In 2 principal axes, optional in 3 principal axes (max. ±100
m)
Circular: in 2 axes (radius max. 999 m)
C axis: Interpolation in the linear axes X and Z with the C axis
Feed rate mm/min or mm/rev

Constant surface speed
Max. feed rate (60 000/pole pairs × ball screw pitch) at fPWM = 5000
Hz
Spindle Maximum 40 000 rpm (with 2 pole pairs)
Axis feedback control Integrated digital drive control for synchronous and asynchronous
motors (not MC 320T)
Position loop resolution: Signal period of the position encoder/1024
Position control clock pulse: 3 ms
Speed control clock pulse: 0.6 ms
Current control: 0.1 ms
Error compensation Linear and nonlinear axis error, backlash, reversal peaks during circular
movements
Static friction
Data interfaces 100BaseT Fast Ethernet interface

3x USB 1.1 (2x USB on the rear, 1x USB on the front)
Diagnosis Fast and simple troubleshooting through integrated diagnostic aids
Surrounding temperature Operation: +5 °C to 45 °C

Storage: –35 °C to +65 °C

User functions
Configuration Basic version: X and Z axis, spindle

Y axis (optional)
Positionable spindle and driven tool (optional)
C axis and driven tool (optional)
Digital current and speed control (not MC 320T)
Manual operation Manual slide movement through axis-direction keys or electronic

handwheel
Graphic support for entering and running Teach-in cycles without
saving the machining steps in alternation with manual machine
operation
Thread reworking (thread repair in a second workpiece setup)
(optional)
Teach-in mode Sequential linking of Teach-in cycles, where each machining cycle is
run immediately after input, or is graphically simulated and
subsequently saved.
Program Run mode All are possible in single-block and full-sequence modes:
DINplus programs
smart.Turn programs (optional)
Teach-in programs (optional)
Setup functions Workpiece datum setting

Definition of tool-change position
Definition of protection zone
Measurement of the tool by touch-off, touch probe, or optical gauge

User functions
Programming – Teach-in mode (optional) Turning cycles for simple and complex contours, and contours
described with ICP
Contour-parallel turning cycles
Recessing cycles for simple or complex contours, or contours
defined with ICP
Repetitions with recessing cycles
Recess turning cycles for simple and complex contours, and
contours described with ICP
Undercut and parting cycles (optional)
Threading cycles for single or multi-start longitudinal, taper or API
threads
Cycles for axial and radial drilling, pecking and tapping operations
with the C axis
Thread milling with the C axis
Axial and radial milling cycles for slots, figures, single surfaces and
polygons as well as for complex contours defined with ICP for
machining with the C axis
Helical slot milling with the C axis
Linear and circular patterns for drilling and milling operations with the
C axis
Context-sensitive help graphics
Transfer of cutting values from technology database
Use of DIN macros in Teach-in programs
Conversion of Teach-in programs to smart.Turn programs
Interactive contour programming (ICP) Contour definition with linear and circular contour elements
(optional) Immediate display of entered contour elements
Calculation of missing coordinates, intersections, etc.
Graphic display of all solutions for selection by the user if more than
one solution is possible
Chamfers, rounding arcs and undercuts available as form elements
Input of form elements immediately during contour creation or by
superimposition later
Changes to existing contours can be programmed
C-axis machining on face and lateral Description of individual holes and hole patterns
surface Description of figures and figure patterns for milling operations
Creation of freely definable milling contours
Y-axis machining in the XY and ZY Description of individual holes and hole patterns
planes Description of figures and figure patterns for milling operations
Creation of freely definable milling contours
DXF import Importing contours for turning

Importing contours for milling

User functions
smart.Turn programming (optional) The basis is the unit, which is the complete description of a
machining block (geometry, technology and cycle data)
Dialog boxes divided into overview and detail forms
Fast navigation between the fillable forms and input groups via the
“smart” keys
Context-sensitive help graphics
Start unit with global settings
Transfer of global values from the start unit
Transfer of cutting values from technology database
Units for all lathe and recessing operations
Use of the contours described with ICP for turning and recess
turning operations
Units for all milling and drilling operations with the C axis
Use of the patterns and contours described with ICP for C-axis
operations
Units for activating/deactivating the C axis
Units for all milling and drilling operations with the Y axis
Use of the patterns and contours described with ICP for Y-axis
operations
Special units for subprograms and program part repeats
Verification graphics for blank and finished part and for C and Y axis
contours
Turret assignment and other setup information in the smart.Turn
program
Parallel programming
Parallel simulation
DINplus programming Programming in DIN 66025 format

Extended command format (IF... THEN ... ELSE...)
Simple geometry programming (calculation of missing data)
Powerful fixed cycles for area clearance, recessing, recess turning
and thread machining
Powerful fixed cycles for drilling and milling with the C axis (optional)
Powerful fixed cycles for drilling and milling with the Y axis (optional)
Subprograms
Programming with variables
Contour description with ICP (optional)
Program verification graphics for workpiece blank and finished part
Turret assignment and other setup information in the DINplus
program
Conversion of smart.Turn units into DINplus command sequences
(optional)
Parallel programming
Parallel simulation

User functions
Test run graphics Graphic simulation of sequence of Teach-in cycle, Teach-in,

smart.Turn or DINplus programs
Display of the tool paths as wire-frame or cutting-path graphics,
special identification of the rapid-traverse paths
Machining simulation (2-D material-removal graphic)
Display of programmed contours
Side or face view, or 2-D view of cylindrical surface for verification of
C axis machining
View of face (XY plane) and YZ plane for verification of Y-axis
machining
Shifting and magnifying functions
3-D graphics for display of workpiece blank and finished part as solid-
model view
Machining time analysis Calculation of machining times and idle times

Consideration of switching commands triggered by the CNC
Representation of time per individual cycle or per tool change
Tool database For 250 tools

For 999 tools (optional)
Tool description can be entered for every tool
Automatic inspection of tool-tip position with respect to the contour
Compensation of tool-tip position in the X/Y/Z plane
High-precision correction via handwheel, capturing compensation
values in the tool table
Automatic tool-tip and cutter radius compensation
Tool monitoring for lifetime of the insert (tool tip) or the number of
workpieces produced
Tool monitoring with automatic tool change after tool insert wear
(optional)
Management of multipoint tools (multiple inserts or reference
points)
Technology database (optional) Access to cutting data after definition of workpiece material, cutting
material and machining mode. The CNC PILOT distinguishes
between 16 machining modes. Each workpiece-material/tool-
material combination includes the cutting speed, the main and
secondary feed rates, and the infeed for 16 machining modes.
Automatic determination of the machining modes from the cycle or
the machining unit
The cutting data are entered in the cycle or in the unit as default
values.
(optional)

User functions
Conversational languages ENGLISH

GERMAN
CZECH
FRENCH
ITALIAN
SPANISH
PORTUGUESE
SWEDISH
DANISH
FINNISH
DUTCH
POLISH
HUNGARIAN
RUSSIAN
CHINESE
CHINESE_TRAD
Further languages available as options (see option number 41).
Accessories
Electronic handwheels HR 180 panel-mounted handwheels with connection to position

inputs, plus
One HR 130 panel-mounted serial handwheel, or one portable serial
handwheel HR 410
Touch probe TS 220: 3-D touch trigger probe with cable connection, or
TS 440: 3-D touch trigger probe with infrared transmission
TS 444: Battery-free 3-D touch trigger probe with infrared
transmission
TS 640: 3-D touch trigger probe with infrared transmission
TS 740: High-precision 3-D touch trigger probe with infrared
transmission
TT 140: 3-D touch trigger probe for tool measurement
DataPilot CP620 Control software for PCs for programming, archiving, and training for
the CNC PILOT 620:
Full version with license for single station or multiple stations
Demo version (free of charge)

Option
Option ID Description
number
0 to 3 Additional axis 354 540-01 Additional control loops 1, 2, 3 and 4
353 904-01
353 905-01
367 867-01 Only possible with MC 6110T
8 Software option 1 632 226-01 Cycle programming

Contour description with ICP
Cycle programming
Technology database with 9 workpiece-material/tool-
material combinations
9 Software option 2 632 227-01 smart.Turn

Contour description with ICP
Programming with smart.Turn
Technology database with 9 workpiece-material/tool-
material combinations
10 Software option 3 632 228-01 Tools and technology

Tool database expanded to 999 entries
Technology database expanded to 62 workpiece-material/
tool-material combinations
Tool life monitoring with exchange tools
11 Software option 4 632 229-01 Threads

Thread recutting
Handwheel superimposition during thread cutting
17 Software option 632 230-01 Tool measurement and workpiece measurement

TCH PROBE functions
Determining tool-setting dimensions with a touch probe
Determining tool-setting dimensions with an optical gauge
Automatic workpiece measurement
41 Additional language 530 184-01 Slovenian

530 184-02 Slovak
530 184-03 Latvian
530 184-04 Norwegian
530 184-06 Korean
530 184-07 Estonian
530 184-08 Turkish
530 184-09 Romanian
530 184-10 Lithuanian

Option
Option ID Description
number
42 Software option DXF import 632 231-01 DXF import

Loading of DXF contours
55 Software option C-axis 633 944-01 C-axis machining

machining
70 Y-axis machining 661 881-01 Y-axis machining
94 W-axis machining 661 881-01 Support of W axis

508
Overview of Cycles
10.1 Workpiece Blank Cycles, Single Cut Cycles
10.1 Workpiece Blank Cycles, Single
Cut Cycles
Workpiece blank cycles Page

Overview 112
Standard blank 113
ICP blank 114
Single cut cycles Page

Overview 115
Rapid traverse positioning 116
Move to the tool change position 117
Linear machining, longitudinal 118

Single longitudinal cut
Linear machining, transverse 119

Single transverse cut
Linear machining at angle 120

Single oblique cut
Circular machining 122

Single circular cut
Circular machining 122

Single circular cut
Chamfer 123
For machining a chamfer
Rounding arc 125

For machining a rounding arc
M function 126
For entering an M function
510 Overview of Cycles

10.2 Turning Cycles
10.2 Turning Cycles
Turning cycles Page

Overview 127
Cut longitudinal 130

Roughing and finishing cycle for simple
contours
Cut transverse 131
contours
Cut with longitudinal plunge 142
simple contours
Plunge, transverse 144
contours
ICP contour-parallel, longitudinal 156
Roughing and finishing cycle for any type
of contour
ICP contour-parallel, transverse 158
of contour
ICP cut longitudinal 162
of contour
ICP cut transverse 164
of contour

10.3 Recessing and Recess-Turning Cycles
10.3 Recessing and Recess-Turning
Cycles
Recessing cycles Page

Overview 172
Recessing, radial 174

Recessing and finishing cycles for simple
contours
Recessing, axial 175
Recessing and finishing cycles for simple
contours
ICP recessing, radial 187
Recessing and finishing cycles for any
contour
ICP recessing, axial 189
Recessing and finishing cycles for any
contour
Undercut H 217
Undercut K 218
Undercut U 219
Parting 221
Cycle for parting the workpiece
Recess-turning cycles Page

Overview 194
Recess turning, radial 195

Recess-turning and finishing cycles for
simple contours
Recess-turning, axial 196
simple contours
ICP recess turning, radial 209
any type of contour
ICP recess turning, axial 211
any type of contour

10.4 Thread Cycles
10.4 Thread Cycles
Thread cycles Page

Overview 225
Thread cycle 229

Longitudinal single or multi-start thread
Tapered thread 233

Tapered single or multi-start thread
API thread 235

Single or multi-start API thread (API:
American Petroleum Institute)
Thread recutting 237
Recut longitudinal single or multi-start
thread
Tapered thread, recutting 241
Recut tapered single or multi-start thread
API thread, recutting 243

Recut single or multi-start API thread
Undercut DIN 76 245

Thread undercut and thread chamfer
Undercut DIN 509 E 247

Undercut DIN 509 F 249


10.5 Drilling Cycles
10.5 Drilling Cycles
Drilling cycles Page

Overview 253
Axial drilling cycle 254

For drilling single holes and patterns
Radial drilling cycle 256

Axial deep-hole drilling cycle 258

Radial deep-hole drilling cycle 260

Axial tapping cycle 262

Radial tapping cycle 263

Thread milling 265

For milling threads in existing holes

10.6 Milling Cycles
10.6 Milling Cycles
Milling cycles Page

Overview 269
Rapid traverse positioning 270

Activate C axis; position tool and spindle
Slot, axial 271

For milling single slots or slot patterns
Figure, axial 273

Axial ICP contour 277

For milling single ICP contours or contour
patterns
Face milling 280
For milling surfaces or polygons
Slot, radial 283

For milling single slots or slot patterns
Figure, radial 285

Radial ICP contour 289

For milling single ICP contours or contour
patterns
Helical-slot milling, radial 292
For milling a helical slot
Thread milling 265

For milling threads in existing holes

10.6 Milling Cycles

Index
A Cut, ICP transverse ... 164 Drilling cycles, cycle
Absolute coordinates ... 39 Cut, ICP transverse finishing ... 167 programming ... 253
Additive compensation ... 96 Cut, longitudinal ... 130 Drilling pattern linear, axial ... 298
Input during program Cut, longitudinal finishing ... 136 Drilling, axial ... 254
execution ... 96, 97 Cut, longitudinal finishing plunge ... 150 Drilling, radial ... 256
Additive compensation for cycle Cut, longitudinal finishing plunge— Drilling/milling patterns ... 297
programming ... 111 expanded ... 152 Driven tool ... 441, 442
Alphanumeric keyboard ... 51 Cut, longitudinal finishing— Driven tools ... 76
API thread ... 235 expanded ... 138 Dry run mode ... 98
API thread, recutting ... 243 Cut, longitudinal plunge ... 142 DXF contours ... 415
Axis designations ... 38 Cut, longitudinal plunging—
expanded ... 146 E
B Cut, longitudinal—expanded ... 132 End point of ICP contour ... 328
Backup ... 471 Cut, transverse ... 131 Equidistant line (MCRC) ... 43
Backup name ... 475 Cut, transverse finishing ... 137 Equidistant line (TRC) ... 43
Bar/tube blank ... 113 Cut, transverse finishing plunge ... 151 Error log file ... 58
Basic-block mode Cut, transverse finishing plunge— Error messages ... 56
Display during program expanded ... 154 Ethernet ... 472
execution ... 94 Cut, transverse finishing— Ethernet interface ... 472
Block number expanded ... 140 Example of drilling cycles ... 267
Cycle programming ... 90 Cut, transverse plunge ... 144 Example of milling cycle ... 296
Cut, transverse plunging— Example of pattern machining ... 314
C expanded ... 148 Example of thread and undercut
C axis, fundamentals ... 31 Cut, transverse—expanded ... 134 cycles ... 251
Calculator ... 52 Cutting direction (cycle Examples of recessing cycles ... 223
C-axis values, setting... ... 82 programming) ... 293, 295 Examples of turning cycles ... 168
Chamfer ... 123 Cutting limits SX, SZ ... 111
Circular drilling pattern, axial ... 302 Cycle keys ... 107 F
Circular drilling pattern, radial ... 310 Cycle menu ... 109 Feed angle ... 226
Circular machining ... 122 Cycle programming Feed rate ... 70
Circular milling pattern, axial ... 304 Cycle keys ... 107 Feed rate reduction for drilling
Comments Cycle programs, converting ... 483 Cycle programming
Comment blocks in cycle Cycle starting point ... 106 Deep-hole drilling ... 259, 261
programs ... 108 Cycle status ... 70 Drilling cycle ... 255, 257
Comments in cycles ... 108 Cycles in Manual mode ... 89 File organization ... 100
Compensation, additive ... 96 Cycles, addresses used ... 111 Form elements (ICP)
Continuous run Fundamentals ... 321
Program execution ... 94 D Form elements, ICP ... 321
Conversion into DIN format ... 102 Data backup ... 35
Coordinate system ... 39 Data entry—fundamentals ... 50 G
Coordinates, absolute ... 39 Data transfer ... 471 Geometry calculations (ICP) ... 322
Coordinates, incremental ... 40 DATAPILOT ... ... 471
Coordinates, polar ... 40 Deep-hole drilling, axial ... 258 H
Cut, ICP contour-parallel, Deep-hole drilling, radial ... 260 Handwheel operation ... 88
longitudinal ... 156 Defining the tool change position ... 81 Handwheel resolution ... 103
Cut, ICP contour-parallel, longitudinal Defining the workpiece zero point ... 78 Help graphics ... 107
finishing ... 160 DIN cycle ... 317
Cut, ICP contour-parallel, DIN cycle (cycle programming) ... 317
transverse ... 158 DIN macros ... 107
Cut, ICP contour-parallel, transverse DIN programs, converting ... 484
finishing ... 161 Direction of rotation (tool
Cut, ICP longitudinal ... 162 parameters) ... 441
Cut, ICP longitudinal finishing ... 166

Index I ICP contours, fundamentals ... 320 ICP recess turning, axial ... 211
ICP absolute or incremental ICP editor in cycle mode ... 323 ICP recess turning, radial ... 209
dimensioning ... 329 ICP editor in smart.Turn ... 325 ICP recess turning, radial
ICP angle input ... 330 ICP face contours in smart.Turn ... 366 finishing ... 213
ICP axial, recess turning, ICP form elements, ICP recessing axial, finishing ... 193
finishing ... 215 superimposing ... 335 ICP recessing cycles, axial ... 189
ICP basic elements, turning ICP geometry calculations ... 322 ICP recessing radial ... 187
contour ... 342 ICP hole in XY plane ... 394 ICP recessing radial, finishing ... 191
ICP centric polygon in XY plane ... 398 ICP hole in YZ plane ... 409 ICP rectangle in XY plane ... 390
ICP centric polygons in YZ plane ... 413 ICP hole on face ... 371 ICP rectangle in YZ plane ... 406
ICP chamfer in XY plane ... 388 ICP hole on lateral surface ... 380 ICP rectangle on face ... 368
ICP chamfer in YZ plane ... 404 ICP horizontal lines in XY plane ... 385 ICP rectangle on lateral surface ... 376
ICP chamfer of turning contour ... 346 ICP horizontal lines in YZ plane ... 401 ICP reference data in XY plane ... 383
ICP chamfer on face ... 357 ICP horizontal lines of a turning ICP reference data in YZ plane ... 399
ICP chamfer on lateral surface ... 362 contour ... 343 ICP reference data: ... 364
ICP circle in XY plane ... 389 ICP horizontal lines on face ... 354 ICP rounding arc in XY plane ... 388
ICP circle in YZ plane ... 405 ICP horizontal lines on lateral ICP rounding arc of turning
ICP circle on face ... 367 surface ... 359 contour ... 346
ICP circular arc in XY plane ... 387 ICP last contour element, editing or ICP rounding arc on face ... 357
ICP circular arc in YZ plane ... 403, 404 deleting ... 336 ICP rounding arc on lateral
ICP circular arc on face ... 356 ICP lateral surface contours in surface ... 362
ICP circular arc, lateral surface ... 361 smart.Turn ... 374 ICP selection functions ... 333
ICP circular arc, turning contour ... 345 ICP line at angle in XY plane ... 386 ICP selection of solutions ... 332
ICP circular on lateral surface ... 375 ICP line at angle in YZ plane ... 402 ICP single hole in XY plane ... 397
ICP circular pattern in XY plane ... 396 ICP line at angle on face ... 355 ICP single surface in YZ plane ... 412
ICP circular pattern in YZ plane ... 411 ICP line at angle on lateral ICP starting point of contour in XY
ICP circular pattern on face ... 373 surface ... 360 plane ... 384
ICP circular pattern on lateral ICP line at angle on turning ICP starting point of contour in YZ
surface ... 382 contour ... 344 plane ... 400
ICP circular slot in XY plane ... 393 ICP linear pattern in XY plane ... 395 ICP starting point of face contour ... 353
ICP circular slot in YZ plane ... 408 ICP linear pattern in YZ plane ... 410 ICP starting point of lateral surface
ICP circular slot on face ... 370 ICP linear pattern on face ... 372 contour ... 358
ICP circular slot on lateral surface ... 379 ICP linear pattern on lateral ICP starting point of turning
ICP contour direction ... 334 surface ... 381 contour ... 342
ICP contour element, deleting ... 336 ICP linear slot in XY plane ... 392 ICP transitions between contour
ICP contour elements ICP linear slot in YZ plane ... 408 elements ... 329
Face ... 353, 366 ICP linear slot on face ... 370 ICP undercut DIN 509 E ... 348
ICP contour elements on the lateral ICP linear slot on lateral surface ... 378 ICP undercut DIN 509 F ... 349
surface ... 358 ICP machining attributes ... 321 ICP undercut DIN 76 ... 347
ICP contour elements, adding ... 335 ICP nested contours and holes ... 364 ICP undercut type H ... 351
ICP contour elements, editing ... 337 ICP polar coordinates ... 330 ICP undercut type K ... 352
ICP contour elements, face ... 353 ICP polygon in XY plane ... 391 ICP undercut type U ... 350
ICP contour elements, turning ICP polygon in YZ plane ... 407 ICP vertical lines in XY plane ... 384
contour ... 342 ICP polygon on face ... 369 ICP vertical lines in YZ plane ... 400
ICP contour form elements ... 346 ICP polygon on lateral surface ... 377 ICP vertical lines of a turning
ICP contour graphics ... 331 ICP programming contour ... 343
ICP contour, creating ... 328 Absolute or incremental ICP vertical lines on face ... 354
ICP contours with C-axis dimensioning ... 329 ICP vertical lines on lateral
machining ... 363 Contour direction ... 334 surface ... 359
ICP contours with Y-axis Contour elements on face ... 366
machining ... 363 Contour elements, face ... 353
ICP contours, editing ... 328, 335
518
Index
ICP workpiece blank contour ... 114 Milling pattern circular, radial ... 312 Program execution ... 94
ICP workpiece blank, "bar" ... 341 Milling pattern linear, radial ... 308 Program information ... 100
ICP workpiece blank, "tube" ... 341 Milling, axial figure ... 273 Program Run ... 91
ICP zoom ... 340 Milling, axial slot ... 271 Program Run mode ... 91
Inch, units of measure ... 41 Milling, face milling ... 280 Program selection ... 100
Incremental coordinates ... 40 Milling, ICP contour, axial ... 277 Program types ... 55
Input box ... 47 Milling, ICP contour, radial ... 289 Proportioning of cuts ... 226
Input fields ... 50 Milling, radial figure ... 285 Protection zone
Milling, radial helical slot ... 292 Display of protection zone
K Milling, radial slot ... 283 status ... 80
Keystroke log file ... 59 Monitoring EnDat encoders ... 63
Multipoint tools, editing ... 437 R
L Rapid positioning milling ... 270
Last cut in thread cycles ... 228 N Rapid traverse positioning ... 116
Linear dimension ... 358 NC programs, importing from Recess turning with ICP, axial ... 211
Linear drilling pattern, radial ... 306 predecessor controls ... 482 Recess turning with ICP, radial ... 209
Linear machining at angle ... 120 Network connections ... 472 Recess turning with ICP, radial
Linear machining, longitudinal ... 118 finishing ... 213
Linear machining, transverse ... 119 O Recess turning, axial ... 196
Linear milling pattern, axial ... 300 Offsets ... 95 Recess turning, axial finishing ... 203
List operations ... 50 Operating modes ... 33, 48 Recess turning, axial finishing—
Log file, error log file ... 58 Operating modes, tool editor ... 432 expanded ... 207
Log file, keystroke log file ... 59 Operation, the basics ... 48 Recess turning, ICP axial,
Optical gauge ... 86 finishing ... 215
M Organization mode of operation ... 464 Recess turning, radial ... 195
M functions ... 126 Recess turning, radial finishing ... 201
M functions in cycles ... 108 P Recess turning, radial finishing—
Machine data display ... 68 Parameters ... 465 expanded ... 205
Machine data, entering ... 66 Parting ... 221 Recess turning, radial—
Machine mode of operation ... 62 Parting tools ... 432 expanded ... 197
Machine setup ... 78 Pattern, circular drilling pattern, Recess turning—fundamentals of cycle
Machine with multifix ... 72 axial ... 302 programming ... 194
Machine with turret ... 72 Pattern, circular drilling pattern, Recessing axial, finishing ... 182
Machine zero point ... 40 radial ... 310 Recessing axial, finishing—
Machining attributes, ICP ... 321 Pattern, circular milling pattern, expanded ... 185
Manual Operation ... 88 axial ... 304 Recessing cycles ... 172
Manual Operation operating mode ... 88 Pattern, circular milling pattern, Recessing cycles, contour forms ... 173
Marking (program transfer) ... 477 radial ... 312 Recessing cycles, direction of cutting
Measuring probe ... 85 Pattern, linear drilling pattern, and infeed ... 172
Menu selection ... 49 axial ... 298 Recessing cycles, undercut
Metric, units of measure ... 41 Pattern, linear drilling pattern, position ... 173
Mid-program startup ... 93 radial ... 306 Recessing radial, finishing ... 181
Milling cutter radius compensation Pattern, linear milling pattern, Recessing radial, finishing—
(MCRC) ... 43 axial ... 300 expanded ... 183
Milling cycles, cycle Pattern, linear milling pattern, Recessing tools ... 432
programming ... 269 radial ... 308 Recessing turning, axial—
Milling direction for contour Polar coordinates ... 40 expanded ... 199
milling ... 293 Position encoders ... 38 Recessing, axial ... 175
Milling direction for pocket Positioning Recessing, axial—expanded ... 179
milling ... 295 Spindle positioning in cycle Recessing, radial ... 174
Milling pattern mode ... 66 Recessing, radial—expanded ... 177
Cycle programming
Notes ... 297

Index Recess-turning tools ... 432 T Tools
Reference mark ... 38 Tapered thread ... 233 Driven tools ... 76
Reference run ... 64, 79 Tapered thread, recutting ... 241 Tool administration (tool
Rounding arc ... 125 Tapping, axial ... 262 management) ... 432
Tapping, radial ... 263 Tool compensation, entering ... 87
S Teach-in ... 90 Tool list ... 434
Safety clearance ... 127 Teach-in mode ... 90 Tools in different quadrants ... 73
Safety clearance G47 ... 111 Teach-in operating mode ... 90 Tools in different quadrants ... 73
Safety clearances SCI and SCK ... 111 Technical characteristics ... 500 Tools measurement with an optical
Saving service files ... 59 Technology editor ... 457 gauge ... 86
Screen ... 47 Thread cycle (longitudinal) ... 229 Tool-tip radius compensation
Set axis values ... 78, 79, 80 Thread cycle (longitudinal)— (TRC) ... 43
Setting the protection zone ... 80 expanded ... 231 Touch probe ... 85
Simulation ... 99, 418 Thread cycles ... 225 Touch-off ... 84
Simulation window ... 421 Thread depth ... 226 Transfer ... 471
Simulation with mid-program Thread milling, axial ... 265 Turning cycles ... 127
startup ... 428 Thread parameters ... 490 Turning cycles, example ... 168
Simulation, material-removal Thread pitch ... 491 Turret list, filling the ... 75
graphic ... 424, 425 Thread position, cycle Turret list, filling with the tool list ... 74
Simulation, miscellaneous programming ... 225
functions ... 420 Thread run-in ... 227 U
Simulation, operating the ... 419 Thread run-out ... 227 Undercut
Simulation, setting up the views ... 421 Thread, recut (longitudinal) ... 237 Parameters, undercut DIN 509 E,
Simulation, tool display ... 423 Thread, recut expanded, DIN 509 F ... 499
Simulation, traverse path ... 423 (longitudinal) ... 239 Parameters, undercut DIN 76 ... 497
Simulation, zoom ... 426 Threads Undercut cycles ... 225
Single cut cycles ... ... 115 Cycle programming Undercut DIN 509 E ... 247
Single-block mode API thread ... 235 Undercut DIN 509 F ... 249
Program execution ... 94 Tapered thread ... 233 Undercut DIN 76 ... 245
Slide position ... 31 Time calculation (simulation) ... 430 Undercut position, cycle
smart.Turn dialogs ... 50 Tool call ... 76 programming ... 225
Soft ... 49 Tool carriers for multifix ... 72 Undercutting type H ... 217
Soft keys ... 49 Tool carriers, turret ... 72 Undercutting type K ... 218
Sorting functions ... 100 Tool change position G14 ... 111 Undercutting type U ... 219
Special compensation (recessing Tool change position, moving to Units of measure ... 41
tools) ... 443, 444 the... ... 117 Unresolved contour elements
Speed limiting Tool compensation ... 87, 95 (ICP) ... 322
Definition in cycle mode ... 66 Tool dimensions, fundamentals ... 42 USB interface ... 472
Spindle ... 71 Tool editor ... 434
Spindle utilization ... 68 Tool life monitoring ... 77 W
Starting point of ICP contour ... 328 Tool list ... 434 Wear compensation ... 432
Stopping angle (cycle mode) ... 66 Tool list, comparing... ... 92 Working with cycles ... 106
Switching functions for cycles ... 108 Tool list, setting up ... 72 Workpiece blank contour, ICP ... 114
Switch-off ... 65 Tool measurement ... 83 Workpiece blank cycles ... 112
Switch-on ... 63 Tool measurement by touching the Workpiece blank definition ICP ... 341
workpiece ... 84 Workpiece zero point ... 41
Tool measurement with a touch
probe ... 85 Y
Tool position in turning cycles ... 128 Y axis, fundamentals ... 32
Tool types ... 432
Tool-life data, editing ... 439
520
DR. JOHANNES HEIDENHAIN GmbH
Dr.-Johannes-Heidenhain-Straße 5
83301 Traunreut, Germany
{ +49 8669 31-0
| +49 8669 5061
E-mail: [email protected]
Technical support | +49 8669 32-1000
Measuring systems { +49 8669 31-3104
TNC support { +49 8669 31-3101
NC programming { +49 8669 31-3103
PLC programming { +49 8669 31-3102
Lathe controls { +49 8669 31-3105
www.heidenhain.de
730 870-20 · Ver00 · SW01 · 0.5 · 10/2010 · F&W · Printed in Germany

CNC Pilot

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

CNC Pilot

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

CNC Pilot

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

User’s Manual

CNC PILOT 620

Starts the integrated calculator

 Parameters Info key: Shows additional information in the

Navigation keys Feed rate stop

Left/Right arrow keys Spindle on – M3/M4 direction

Intended place of operation

HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 620 5

This symbol indicates that important information about the

This symbol indicates that there is one or more of the

This symbol indicates that the described function must be

This symbol indicates that you can find detailed

Do you want any changes, or have you found

HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 620 7

HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 620 9

HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 620 11

HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 620 13

HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 620 15

HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 620 17

HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 620 19

HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 620 21

HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 620 23

HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 620 25

HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 620 27

HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 620 29

30 Introduction and Fundamentals

Tool carrier systems

HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 620 31

32 Introduction and Fundamentals

HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 620 33

34 Introduction and Fundamentals

HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 620 35

36 Introduction and Fundamentals

HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 620 37

38 Introduction and Fundamentals

HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 620 39

Machine zero point

40 Introduction and Fundamentals

Dimensions Metric Inches

HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 620 41

42 Introduction and Fundamentals

Milling cutter radius compensation (MCRC)

HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 620 43

44 Introduction and Fundamentals

HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 620 45

Programming – Teach-in mode

In addition, the control shows the type of operation, the soft-key

Other windows used:

HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 620 47

At some places, a dialog has to be ended in order to switch

HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 620 49

Data entry is concluded when you press the OK or Input

HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 620 51

8 Perform the calculation.

Switch the view of the calculator

Mathematical function Shortcut (soft key)

Arc cosine ARC

Powers of values X^Y

Parameters Info key: Shows additional information in the

On: Constant speed (rpm)